WO2011130625A1 - Feedback control in microfluidic systems - Google Patents

Feedback control in microfluidic systems Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2011130625A1
WO2011130625A1 PCT/US2011/032680 US2011032680W WO2011130625A1 WO 2011130625 A1 WO2011130625 A1 WO 2011130625A1 US 2011032680 W US2011032680 W US 2011032680W WO 2011130625 A1 WO2011130625 A1 WO 2011130625A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
fluid
signal
signals
cassette
fluids
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2011/032680
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Vincent Linder
David Steinmiller
Original Assignee
Claros Diagnostics, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Claros Diagnostics, Inc. filed Critical Claros Diagnostics, Inc.
Priority to CA2795211A priority Critical patent/CA2795211C/en
Priority to BR112012026406A priority patent/BR112012026406B1/en
Priority to CN201180029612.8A priority patent/CN102971076B/en
Priority to JP2013505175A priority patent/JP6104793B2/en
Priority to UAA201212930A priority patent/UA110791C2/en
Priority to EP11716151A priority patent/EP2558202A1/en
Priority to AU2011239534A priority patent/AU2011239534B2/en
Priority to EA201201419A priority patent/EA022356B1/en
Priority to MX2012012066A priority patent/MX2012012066A/en
Publication of WO2011130625A1 publication Critical patent/WO2011130625A1/en
Priority to IL222461A priority patent/IL222461A/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L3/00Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
    • B01L3/50Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
    • B01L3/502Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
    • B01L3/5027Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
    • B01L3/502746Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip characterised by the means for controlling flow resistance, e.g. flow controllers, baffles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L3/00Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
    • B01L3/50Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
    • B01L3/502Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
    • B01L3/5027Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L3/00Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
    • B01L3/50Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
    • B01L3/502Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
    • B01L3/5027Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
    • B01L3/502715Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip characterised by interfacing components, e.g. fluidic, electrical, optical or mechanical interfaces
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L3/00Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
    • B01L3/50Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
    • B01L3/502Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
    • B01L3/5027Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
    • B01L3/50273Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip characterised by the means or forces applied to move the fluids
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L3/00Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
    • B01L3/50Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
    • B01L3/502Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
    • B01L3/5027Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
    • B01L3/502738Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip characterised by integrated valves
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L7/00Heating or cooling apparatus; Heat insulating devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N21/00Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
    • G01N21/01Arrangements or apparatus for facilitating the optical investigation
    • G01N21/03Cuvette constructions
    • G01N21/05Flow-through cuvettes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N21/00Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
    • G01N21/17Systems in which incident light is modified in accordance with the properties of the material investigated
    • G01N21/59Transmissivity
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N21/00Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
    • G01N21/62Systems in which the material investigated is excited whereby it emits light or causes a change in wavelength of the incident light
    • G01N21/63Systems in which the material investigated is excited whereby it emits light or causes a change in wavelength of the incident light optically excited
    • G01N21/64Fluorescence; Phosphorescence
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N21/00Investigating or analysing materials by the use of optical means, i.e. using sub-millimetre waves, infrared, visible or ultraviolet light
    • G01N21/75Systems in which material is subjected to a chemical reaction, the progress or the result of the reaction being investigated
    • G01N21/76Chemiluminescence; Bioluminescence
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/543Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
    • G01N33/54313Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals the carrier being characterised by its particulate form
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/543Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
    • G01N33/54366Apparatus specially adapted for solid-phase testing
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/53Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
    • G01N33/574Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for cancer
    • G01N33/57407Specifically defined cancers
    • G01N33/57434Specifically defined cancers of prostate
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • G01N35/00584Control arrangements for automatic analysers
    • G01N35/00722Communications; Identification
    • G01N35/00732Identification of carriers, materials or components in automatic analysers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/02Adapting objects or devices to another
    • B01L2200/025Align devices or objects to ensure defined positions relative to each other
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/02Adapting objects or devices to another
    • B01L2200/026Fluid interfacing between devices or objects, e.g. connectors, inlet details
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/02Adapting objects or devices to another
    • B01L2200/026Fluid interfacing between devices or objects, e.g. connectors, inlet details
    • B01L2200/027Fluid interfacing between devices or objects, e.g. connectors, inlet details for microfluidic devices
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/02Adapting objects or devices to another
    • B01L2200/028Modular arrangements
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/06Fluid handling related problems
    • B01L2200/0673Handling of plugs of fluid surrounded by immiscible fluid
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/06Fluid handling related problems
    • B01L2200/0684Venting, avoiding backpressure, avoid gas bubbles
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/14Process control and prevention of errors
    • B01L2200/143Quality control, feedback systems
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/14Process control and prevention of errors
    • B01L2200/143Quality control, feedback systems
    • B01L2200/146Employing pressure sensors
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2200/00Solutions for specific problems relating to chemical or physical laboratory apparatus
    • B01L2200/14Process control and prevention of errors
    • B01L2200/143Quality control, feedback systems
    • B01L2200/147Employing temperature sensors
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/02Identification, exchange or storage of information
    • B01L2300/021Identification, e.g. bar codes
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/02Identification, exchange or storage of information
    • B01L2300/023Sending and receiving of information, e.g. using bluetooth
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/02Identification, exchange or storage of information
    • B01L2300/025Displaying results or values with integrated means
    • B01L2300/027Digital display, e.g. LCD, LED
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/04Closures and closing means
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/06Auxiliary integrated devices, integrated components
    • B01L2300/0627Sensor or part of a sensor is integrated
    • B01L2300/0654Lenses; Optical fibres
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/08Geometry, shape and general structure
    • B01L2300/0809Geometry, shape and general structure rectangular shaped
    • B01L2300/0816Cards, e.g. flat sample carriers usually with flow in two horizontal directions
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/08Geometry, shape and general structure
    • B01L2300/0861Configuration of multiple channels and/or chambers in a single devices
    • B01L2300/0867Multiple inlets and one sample wells, e.g. mixing, dilution
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/12Specific details about materials
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/14Means for pressure control
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/16Surface properties and coatings
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/16Surface properties and coatings
    • B01L2300/168Specific optical properties, e.g. reflective coatings
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/18Means for temperature control
    • B01L2300/1805Conductive heating, heat from thermostatted solids is conducted to receptacles, e.g. heating plates, blocks
    • B01L2300/1827Conductive heating, heat from thermostatted solids is conducted to receptacles, e.g. heating plates, blocks using resistive heater
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2300/00Additional constructional details
    • B01L2300/18Means for temperature control
    • B01L2300/1894Cooling means; Cryo cooling
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2400/00Moving or stopping fluids
    • B01L2400/04Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
    • B01L2400/0475Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific mechanical means and fluid pressure
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2400/00Moving or stopping fluids
    • B01L2400/04Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means
    • B01L2400/0475Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific mechanical means and fluid pressure
    • B01L2400/0487Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific mechanical means and fluid pressure fluid pressure, pneumatics
    • B01L2400/049Moving fluids with specific forces or mechanical means specific mechanical means and fluid pressure fluid pressure, pneumatics vacuum
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2400/00Moving or stopping fluids
    • B01L2400/06Valves, specific forms thereof
    • B01L2400/0633Valves, specific forms thereof with moving parts
    • B01L2400/0666Solenoid valves
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L2400/00Moving or stopping fluids
    • B01L2400/08Regulating or influencing the flow resistance
    • B01L2400/082Active control of flow resistance, e.g. flow controllers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B01PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
    • B01LCHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
    • B01L7/00Heating or cooling apparatus; Heat insulating devices
    • B01L7/52Heating or cooling apparatus; Heat insulating devices with provision for submitting samples to a predetermined sequence of different temperatures, e.g. for treating nucleic acid samples
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • G01N2035/00178Special arrangements of analysers
    • G01N2035/00237Handling microquantities of analyte, e.g. microvalves, capillary networks
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • G01N2035/00465Separating and mixing arrangements
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N35/00Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
    • G01N35/00584Control arrangements for automatic analysers
    • G01N35/00722Communications; Identification
    • G01N35/00732Identification of carriers, materials or components in automatic analysers
    • G01N2035/00742Type of codes
    • G01N2035/00752Type of codes bar codes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2201/00Features of devices classified in G01N21/00
    • G01N2201/02Mechanical
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2201/00Features of devices classified in G01N21/00
    • G01N2201/06Illumination; Optics
    • G01N2201/061Sources
    • G01N2201/06113Coherent sources; lasers
    • G01N2201/0612Laser diodes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2201/00Features of devices classified in G01N21/00
    • G01N2201/06Illumination; Optics
    • G01N2201/062LED's
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2201/00Features of devices classified in G01N21/00
    • G01N2201/06Illumination; Optics
    • G01N2201/062LED's
    • G01N2201/0621Supply
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2201/00Features of devices classified in G01N21/00
    • G01N2201/06Illumination; Optics
    • G01N2201/069Supply of sources
    • G01N2201/0696Pulsed
    • G01N2201/0697Pulsed lasers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2333/00Assays involving biological materials from specific organisms or of a specific nature
    • G01N2333/90Enzymes; Proenzymes
    • G01N2333/914Hydrolases (3)
    • G01N2333/948Hydrolases (3) acting on peptide bonds (3.4)
    • G01N2333/95Proteinases, i.e. endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.99)
    • G01N2333/964Proteinases, i.e. endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.99) derived from animal tissue
    • G01N2333/96425Proteinases, i.e. endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.99) derived from animal tissue from mammals
    • G01N2333/96427Proteinases, i.e. endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.99) derived from animal tissue from mammals in general
    • G01N2333/9643Proteinases, i.e. endopeptidases (3.4.21-3.4.99) derived from animal tissue from mammals in general with EC number
    • G01N2333/96433Serine endopeptidases (3.4.21)
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T137/00Fluid handling
    • Y10T137/0318Processes
    • Y10T137/0324With control of flow by a condition or characteristic of a fluid
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y10TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
    • Y10TTECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
    • Y10T436/00Chemistry: analytical and immunological testing
    • Y10T436/12Condition responsive control

Definitions

  • control of fluids involves the use of feedback from one or more processes or events taking place in the microfluidic system.
  • fluids plays an important role in fields such as chemistry, microbiology and biochemistry.
  • These fluids may include liquids or gases and may provide reagents, solvents, reactants, or rinses to chemical or biological processes.
  • microfluidic methods and devices can provide inexpensive, sensitive and accurate analytical platforms
  • fluid manipulations such as the mixture of multiple fluids, sample introduction, introduction of reagents, storage of reagents, separation of fluids, collection of waste, extraction of fluids for off- chip analysis, and transfer of fluids from one chip to the next— can add a level of cost and sophistication. Accordingly, advances in the field that could reduce costs, simplify use, provide quality control of the analysis being performed, and/or improve fluid manipulations in microfluidic systems would be beneficial.
  • control of fluids involves the use of feedback from one or more processes or events taking place in the microfluidic system.
  • the subject matter of the present invention involves, in some cases, interrelated products, alternative solutions to a particular problem, and/or a plurality of different uses of one or more systems and/or articles.
  • a method comprises initiating detection of fluids at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system. The method involves detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at the first measurement zone and forming a first signal corresponding to the first fluid and a second signal corresponding to the second fluid. A first pattern of signals is transmitted to a control system, the first pattern of signals comprising at least two of: a)
  • the method also involves determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system based at least in part on the first pattern of signals.
  • a method comprises detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system, wherein the detection step comprises detecting at least two of a) an opacity of the first fluid; b) a volume of the first fluid; c) a flow rate of the first fluid; d) a position of the detection of the first fluid in time relative to a second position in time; and e) an average time period between the detection of the first and second fluids.
  • the method involves determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system based at least in part on the detection step.
  • a method of conducting quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of a microfluidic system comprises detecting a first fluid at a first measurement zone of the microfluidic system and forming a first signal
  • the method also involves transmitting the first signal to a control system, comparing the first signal to a reference signal, thereby determining the presence of abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system, and determining whether to stop an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system based at least in part on results of the comparing step.
  • FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a microfluidic system and a variety of components that may be part of a sample analyzer according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 2 is a plot showing measurement of optical density as a function of time according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a cassette and fluidic connector according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 4 is a an exploded assembly view of a cassette according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic view of a cassette according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a microfluidic system of a cassette and fluidic connector according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic view of a portion of a sample analyzer according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a control system of a sample analyzer associated with a variety of different components according to one embodiment
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a microfluidic system of a cassette according to one embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a plot showing measurement of optical density as a function of time according to one embodiment.
  • control of fluids involves the use of feedback from one or more processes or events taking place in the microfluidic system.
  • a detector may detect one or more fluids passing across a measurement zone of a microfluidic system and one or more signals, or a pattern of signals, may be generated corresponding to the fluid(s).
  • the signal or pattern of signals may correspond to an intensity (e.g., an indication of the type of fluid passing across the detector), a duration (e.g., an indication of the volume and/or flow rate of fluid), a position in time relative to another position in time or relative to another process that has occurred in the microfluidic system (e.g., when a certain fluid passes across the detector after a valve has been actuated), and/or an average time period between events (e.g., between two consecutive signals).
  • an intensity e.g., an indication of the type of fluid passing across the detector
  • a duration e.g., an indication of the volume and/or flow rate of fluid
  • a position in time relative to another position in time or relative to another process that has occurred in the microfluidic system e.g., when a certain fluid passes across the detector after a valve has been actuated
  • an average time period between events e.g., between two consecutive signals.
  • these and other methods can be used to conduct quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system.
  • an analysis performed in a device can be recorded to produce essentially a "fingerprint" of the analysis, and all or potions of the fingerprint may be used to provide feedback to the microfluidic system.
  • a fingerprint of an analysis may include signals from each fluid at (e.g., passing across, through, above, below, etc.) a detector or multiple detectors, which may be statically positioned at a measurement zone or at multiple measurement zones of a device.
  • the signals may be a measurement of, for example, the transmission of light passing through the fluids. Since different fluids used in the analysis may have different volumes, flow rates, compositions, and other characteristics, the fluids may produce signals having different intensities and durations, which are reflected in the fingerprint.
  • the fingerprint can be used to identify, for example, the fluids used in the analysis, the timing of the fluids (e.g., when particular fluids were introduced into certain regions of the device), and the interaction between the fluids (e.g., mixing).
  • This data can be used to provide feedback to modulate subsequent fluid flow in the microfluidic system, and in some cases, to conduct quality control to determine whether all or portions of the analysis was run properly.
  • the systems and methods described herein may find application in a variety of fields.
  • the systems and methods may be used to conduct quality control to determine, for example, a correct sequence of events taking place in the microfluidic system. If an incorrect sequence of events is determined, the feedback control may, for example, cancel the test being performed in the microfluidic system and/or alert the user of the abnormality.
  • the systems and methods described herein may be used to modulate fluid flow such as mixing, introduction or removal of fluids into certain channels or reservoirs in the microfluidic system, actuation of one or more components such as a valve, pump, vacuum, or heater, and other processes.
  • microfluidic systems such as, for example, microfluidic point-of-care diagnostic platforms, microfluidic laboratory chemical analysis systems, high-throughput detection systems, fluidic control systems in cell cultures or bio-reactors, among others.
  • microfluidic point-of-care diagnostic platforms such as, for example, microfluidic point-of-care diagnostic platforms, microfluidic laboratory chemical analysis systems, high-throughput detection systems, fluidic control systems in cell cultures or bio-reactors, among others.
  • 2300751.1 herein may be particularly useful, in some cases, where an inexpensive, robust, disposable microfluidic device is desired.
  • the feedback control described herein may be used to perform any suitable process in a microfluidic system, such as a chemical and/or biological reaction.
  • the feedback control may be used to control reagent transport in antibody assays that employ unstable reaction precursors, such as the silver solution assay described in the Examples section.
  • unstable reaction precursors such as the silver solution assay described in the Examples section.
  • FIG. 1 shows a block diagram 10 of a microfluidic system and various components that may provide feedback control according to one set of embodiments.
  • the microfluidic system may include, for example, a device or cassette 20 operatively associated with one or more components such as a fluid flow source 40 such as a pump (e.g., for introducing one or more fluids into the device and/or for controlling the rates of fluid flow), optionally a fluid flow source 40 such as a pump or vacuum that may be configured to apply either of both of a positive pressure or vacuum (e.g., for
  • the components may be external or internal to the microfluidic device, and may optionally include one or more processors for controlling the component or system of components. In certain embodiments, one or more such components and/or processors are associated with a sample analyzer 47 configured to process and/or analyze a sample contained in the microfluidic system.
  • a component that is "operatively associated with" one or more other components indicates that such components are directly connected to each other, in direct physical contact with each other without being connected or attached to each other, or are not directly connected to each other or in contact with each other, but are mechanically, electrically (including via electromagnetic signals transmitted through space), or fluidically interconnected (e.g., via channels such as tubing) so as to cause or enable the components so associated to perform their intended functionality.
  • control system 50 may be used to control fluids and/or conduct quality control by the use of feedback from one or more events taking place in the microfluidic system.
  • control system may be configured to receive input signals from the one or more components, to calculate and/or control various parameters, to compare one or more signals or a pattern of signals with signals or values pre-programmed into the control system, and/or to send signals to one or more components to modulate fluid flow and/or control operation of the microfluidic system.
  • feedback control are provided below.
  • control system may also be optionally associated with other components such as a user interface 54, an identification system 56, an external communication unit 58 (e.g., a USB), and/or other components, as described in more detail below.
  • Microfluidic device (e.g., cassette) 20 may have any suitable configuration of channels and/or components for performing a desired analysis.
  • Microfluidic device e.g., cassette
  • Microfluidic device 20 may have any suitable configuration of channels and/or components for performing a desired analysis.
  • channels and/or components for performing a desired analysis.
  • microfluidic device 20 contains stored reagents that can be used for performing a chemical and/or biological reaction (e.g., an immunoassay).
  • the microfluidic device may include, for example, an optional reagent inlet 62 in fluid communication with an optional reagent storage area 64.
  • the storage area may include, for example, one or more channels and/or reservoirs that may, in some embodiments, be partially or completely filled with fluids (e.g., liquids and gases, including immiscible reagents such as reagent solutions and wash solutions, optionally separated by immiscible fluids, as described in more detail below).
  • the device may also include an optional sample or reagent loading area 66, such as a fluidic connector that can be used to connect reagent storage area 64 to an optional measurement zone 68 (e.g., a reaction area).
  • the measurement zone which may include one or more zones (e.g., detection regions) for detecting a component in a sample, may be in fluid communication with an optional waste area 70 and coupled to outlet 72. In one set of embodiments, fluid may flow in the direction of the arrows shown in the figure. Further description and examples of such and other components are provided in more detail below.
  • sections 71 and 77 of the device are not in fluid communication with one another prior to introduction of a sample into the device. In some cases, sections 71 and 77 are not in fluid communication with one another prior to
  • one or more fluid flow sources 40 such as a pump and/or a vacuum or other pressure-control system, valving system 28, detection system 34, temperature regulating system 41, and/or other components may be operatively associated with one or more of reagent inlet 62, reagent storage area 64, sample or reagent loading area 66, measurement zone 68, waste area 70, outlet 72, and/or other regions of microfluidic device 20. Detection of processes or events in one or more regions of the microfluidic device can produce a signal or pattern of signals that can be transmitted to control system 50.
  • this feedback can be used to manipulate fluids within and/or between each of these regions of the microfluidic device, such as by controlling one or more of a pump, vacuum, valving system, detection system, temperature regulating system, and/or other components.
  • the feedback can determine abnormalities that have occurred in the microfluidic system, and the control system may send a signal to one or more components to cause all or portions of the system to shut down. Consequently, the quality of the processes being performed in the microfluidic system can be controlled using the systems and methods described herein.
  • feedback control involves the detection of one or more events or processes occurring in a microfluidic system.
  • detection may involve, for example, determination of at least one characteristic of a fluid, a component within a fluid, interaction between components within regions of the microfluidic device, or a condition within a region of the microfluidic device (e.g., temperature, pressure, humidity). For instance, detection may involve detecting an opacity of one or more fluids, a
  • Detection of the one more characteristics, conditions, or events may, in some embodiments, result in the generation of one or more signals, which can be
  • the one or more signals may be compared with one or more signals, values or thresholds pre-programmed into the control system, and may be used to provide feedback to the microfluidic system.
  • a variety of signals or patterns of signals can be generated and/or determined
  • a signal includes an intensity component.
  • Intensity may indicate or be used to indicate, for example, one or more of: the concentration of a component in a fluid, an indication of the type of fluid being detected (e.g., a sample type such as blood versus urine, or a physical characteristic of the fluid such as a liquid versus a gas), the amount of a component in a fluid, and the volume of a fluid.
  • intensity is determined by an opacity of a fluid or a component.
  • intensity is determined by the use of a marker or label such as a fluorescent marker or label.
  • a frequency of signals may be generated and/or determined. For example, a series of signals each having an intensity (e.g., above or below a threshold intensity) may be measured by a detector. This number may be compared with a number of signals or values (having the intensity above or below the threshold intensity) pre-programmed into a control system or other unit. Based at least in part on this comparison, the control system may initiate, halt, or change a condition such as the modulation of fluid flow in the microfluidic system.
  • a duration of a signal is generated and/or determined.
  • the duration of a signal may indicate or be used to indicate, for example, one or more of: the volume of a fluid, the flow rate of a fluid, a characteristic of a component within a fluid (e.g., how long a component has a certain activity, such as chemiluminescence, fluorescence, and the like), and how long a particular fluid has been positioned in a specific region of the microfluidic device.
  • a position of a signal in time relative to a second position in time or relative to another process or event is generated and/or determined.
  • a detector may detect when a certain fluid passes across the detector (e.g., a first position in time), and the timing of this signal may be related to a second position in time (e.g., when detection was initiated; a certain amount of time after a process has occurred, etc.).
  • a detector may detect when a certain fluid passes across the detector after (or before) a
  • the opening of a valve may indicate that the mixing of reagents is about to occur, and thus the position of the signal in time may give some indication of when a certain fluid passes across the detector after (or before) the mixing of the reagents. If the position of the signal of the fluid occurs within a certain time range after (or before) the mixing of reagents, for example, this may indicate that the analysis is running properly.
  • a detector may detect when a second fluid passes across the detector after a first fluid has passed across the detector.
  • a position of a signal in time is determined relative to a certain event or process that is taking or has taken place in the microfluidic system (e.g., the start of the analysis, the initiation of fluid flow, the initiation of detection in the microfluidic system, upon a user inserting the microfluidic device into an analyzer, etc.).
  • an average time between signals or events is generated and/or determined. For instance, the average time period between two signals may be measured, where each of the signals may independently correspond to one or more characteristics or conditions described herein. In other embodiments, the average time between the first and the last of a series of similar signals is determined (e.g., the average time between a series of wash fluids passing across a detector).
  • a pattern of signals is generated and/or determined.
  • the pattern of signals may include, for example, at least two of (or, in other embodiments, at least three of, or at least four of) an intensity of a signal, a frequency of signals, a duration of a signal, a position of a signal in time relative to a second position in time or relative to another process or event occurring (or has occurred) in the microfluidic system, and an average time period between two or more signals or events.
  • the pattern of signals comprises at least two of (or, in other embodiments, at least three of, or at least four of) an intensity of a first signal, a duration of the first signal, a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time; an intensity of a second signal, a duration of the second signal, a position of the second signal in time relative to a second position in time, and an average time period between the first and second signals.
  • the pattern of signals may indicate, in some embodiments, whether a particular event or process is taking place properly within the microfluidic system. In other embodiments, the pattern of signals indicates whether a particular
  • a pattern of signals can indicate a particular sequence of events.
  • a variety of signals or patterns of signals, such as those described above and herein, can be generated and/or determined and can be used alone or in combination to provide feedback for controlling one more or more processes, such as modulation of fluid flow in a microfluidic system. That is, the control system or any other suitable unit may determine, in some embodiments, whether to modulate fluid flow in the
  • microfluidic system based at least in part on the pattern of signals. For example, determination of whether to modulate fluid flow based at least in part on a pattern of signals that includes an intensity of a first signal and a position in time of the first signal relative to a second position in time may involve the use of both of these pieces of information to make a decision on whether or not to modulate fluid flow. For instance, these signals may be compared to one or more reference signals (e.g., a threshold intensity or intensity range, and a threshold position in time or range of positions in time, relative to a second position in time) that may be pre-programmed or pre-set into the control system. If each of the measured signals falls within the respective threshold values or ranges, a decision on whether to modulate fluid flow can be made.
  • reference signals e.g., a threshold intensity or intensity range, and a threshold position in time or range of positions in time, relative to a second position in time
  • Only one of the parameters to be considered e.g., only an intensity of the first signal or only a position in time of the first signal
  • a threshold value or range may not be sufficient information to make a decision on whether or not to modulate fluid flow, because it may not give enough information about the fluid(s) or component(s) that gave rise to the signal(s) for the purposes described herein.
  • the fluid or component detected may not be sufficiently identified for the purposes described herein unless a pattern of signals is taken into consideration.
  • one or more measured signals is processed or manipulated (e.g., before or after transmission, and/or before being compared to a reference signal or value). It should be appreciated, therefore, that when a signal is transmitted (e.g., to a control system), compared (e.g., with a reference signal or value), or otherwise used in a feedback process, that the raw signal may be used or a processed/manipulated signal based (at least in part) on the raw signal may be used.
  • one or more derivative signals of a measured signal can be calculated (e.g., using a differentiator, or any other suitable method) and used to provide feedback.
  • signals are normalized (e.g., subtracting a measured signal
  • a signal comprises a slope or average slope, e.g., an average slope of intensity as a function of time.
  • the measured signal may be converted to a digital signal with the use of an analog to digital converter so that all further signal processing may be performed by a digital computer or digital signal processor.
  • all signal processing is performed digitally, the present invention is not so limited, as analog processing techniques may alternatively be used.
  • a digital to analog converter may be used to produce an output signal.
  • Signals may be processed in a time domain (one-dimensional signals), spatial domain (multidimensional signals), frequency domain, autocorrelation domain, or any other suitable domain.
  • signals are filtered, e.g., using a linear filter (a linear transformation of a measured signal), a non-linear filter, a causal filter, a non-causal filter, a time-invariant filter, a time- variant filter, or other suitable filters.
  • a linear filter a linear transformation of a measured signal
  • a non-linear filter a causal filter
  • a non-causal filter a time-invariant filter
  • time- variant filter or other suitable filters.
  • the signal(s) may be optionally transmitted to a control system.
  • the control system compares the signal or pattern of signals to a second set of signal(s).
  • the second signal or pattern of signals may be, for example, signal(s) determined previously in the microfluidic system, or reference signal(s) or value(s) which may have been pre-programmed into the control system or other unit of the microfluidic system.
  • a reference signal or pattern of signals includes one or more threshold values or a range of threshold values.
  • the control system may compare a first signal or pattern of signals with a second signal or pattern of signals (e.g., reference signals), and determine whether to initiate, cease, or modulate one or more events or series of events in the microfluidic system. That is, the measured signal or pattern of signals can be used by the control system to generate a drive signal and provide feedback control to the microfluidic system. For example, the control system may determine whether to modulate fluid flow (e.g., flow rate, mixing, the ceasing of flow of one or more fluids) in one or more regions of the microfluidic system. Other conditions such a modulation of temperature, pressure, humidity, or other conditions can also be controlled. This modulation may be performed, in certain embodiments, by the control system sending one or more drive signals to an appropriate component of the microfluidic system (e.g., a valve, pump, vacuum, heater, or other
  • control system can determine whether or not to cease operation of one or more components of the microfluidic system. In some cases, the control system may determine whether or not to stop an analysis or a portion of an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system.
  • a method of conducting feedback control may involve initiating detection of fluids at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system.
  • a first fluid and a second fluid may be detected at the first measurement zone and a first signal corresponding to the first fluid and a second signal corresponding to the second fluid may be formed.
  • a first pattern of signals may be transmitted to a control system, the first pattern of signals comprising at least two of an intensity of the first signal, a duration of the first signal, a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time, and an average time period between the first and second signals.
  • a decision about whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system may be determined based at least in part on the first pattern of signals.
  • a method of conducting feedback involves detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system, wherein the detection step comprises detecting at least two of (or at least three of) an opacity of the first fluid, a volume of the first fluid, a flow rate of the first fluid, a position of the detection of the first fluid in time relative to a second position in time, and an average time period between the detection of the first and second fluids.
  • a decision about whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system may be determined based at least in part on the detection step.
  • feedback control can be used to modulate the same condition, event, or type of condition or event that was first detected. For instance, the concentration of a component in a fluid can be determined, and a signal can be generated
  • the flow rate of a fluid in a channel is measured, and based at least in part on the signal generated from the measurement, the source of fluid flow (e.g., a vacuum or pump) or a valve is used to modulate the flow rate in that same channel.
  • the signal generated may be compared to a pre-determined signal or values indicating a desired value or range of conditions (e.g., concentration, flow rate).
  • the feedback control may involve a feedback loop (e.g., a positive or negative feedback loop) in some cases. In other cases, feedback control does not involve a feedback loop.
  • feedback control is based at least in part on the determination of one or more first conditions or events taking place in the microfluidic system, and signals from the one or more conditions or events is used to control a second, different set of conditions or events taking place (or events that will take place) in the microfluidic system.
  • the second, different set of conditions or events do not substantially affect the first set of conditions or events (e.g., in contrast to the examples of above involving the modulation of concentration of a component or the flow rate in a channel).
  • detection takes place at a measurement zone, and feedback from the measurement zone is used to modulate fluid flow at a different region of the microfluidic system.
  • detection of a certain fluid passing across a detection system may trigger control of whether or not a particular valve is actuated to allow flow of one or more different fluids in a different region of the microfluidic system.
  • detection of a first fluid at (e.g., passing across) a reaction area may trigger the mixing of second and third fluids at a mixing region of the microfluidic system.
  • the second and third fluids may be initially positioned at a different region (e.g., a storage region) of the microfluidic system than from where detection and production of the signal used to provide feedback takes place.
  • the measurement of optical density of a sample flowing across a measurement zone gives an indication of whether the sample was introduced at the right time and/or the presence of the correct type or volume of sample.
  • the one or more signals from this measurement can be compared to one or more pre-set values, and based (at least in part) on this feedback and comparison, a control system may cease fluid flow in the
  • 2300751.1 microfluidic system e.g., a second, different condition
  • the first condition or event has already passed after the detection step, such that feedback control does not substantially modulate that same condition, event, or type of condition or event that produced the signal used for feedback.
  • one or more feedback control methods such as proportional control, integral control, proportional-integral control, derivative control, proportional-derivative control, integral-derivative control, and proportional-integral- derivative control can be used by a control system to modulate fluid flow.
  • the feedback control may involve a feedback loop in some embodiments.
  • a drive signal (which may be used to modulate fluid flow, e.g., by actuating a component of the microfluidic system) may be generated based at least in part on a signal that is the difference between a preprogrammed threshold signal or value (which may be indicative of a future action to be performed) and a feedback signal that is measured by a detector.
  • Detection of a condition or an event taking place in a microfluidic system may have a variety of forms. In some cases, detection occurs continuously. In other embodiments, detection occurs periodically; and yet other embodiments, detection occurs sporadically. In some cases, detection occurs upon a specific event or condition taking place.
  • one or more detectors is stationery with respect to a microfluidic device during use and/or during detection.
  • a stationery detector may be positioned adjacent a certain region of the microfluidic device, such as a detection region or measurement zone, where one or more events (e.g., a chemical or biological reaction) takes place.
  • the detector may detect, for example, the passing of fluids across the measurement zone.
  • the detector may detect the binding or association of other components at that region (e.g., the binding of a component to surface of the measurement zone).
  • a stationery detector may monitor multiple measurement zones simultaneously.
  • a detector such as a camera may be used to image an entire microfluidic device, or large portion of the device, and only certain areas of the device scrutinized. Components such
  • 2300751.1 as optical fibers may be used to transmit light from multiple measurement zones to a single detector.
  • a detector is removably positioned with respect to the microfluidic device during use and/or during detection.
  • a detector may be physically moved across different regions of the microfluidic device to detect the movement of fluids across the device.
  • a detector may track the movement of certain fluids and/or components in channels of the microfluidic device.
  • microfluidic device can moved relative to a stationary detector.
  • Other configurations and uses of detectors are also possible.
  • FIG. 2 is a plot showing the detection of various fluids as they flow in a region of a device (e.g., a channel) and pass across a detector.
  • Plot 100 shows the measurement of optical density in arbitrary units (y-axis) as a function of time (x-axis).
  • the transmission and/or absorbance of a fluid can be detected as it passes across a region of a microfluidic system.
  • An optical density of zero may indicate maximum light transmission (e.g., low absorbance) and a higher optical density may indicate low transmission (e.g., higher absorbance).
  • the detection of specific fluids including their volumes, flow rates, and fluid types, can be determined.
  • First fluid 110 has a particular intensity 112 (e.g., an optical density of about 0.23). If a particular type of fluid having a specific intensity or range of intensities is expected to flow across the detector at a particular point in time (e.g., at a time of approximately 400 seconds after initiation of detection) or between a certain period of time (e.g., sometime between 0 and 800 seconds), the confirmation that this process has occurred can be detected.
  • first fluid producing 110 may, in some embodiments, be a particular type of sample that is to be introduced into the microfluidic device for performing a particular analysis. If the sample type is associated with a particular intensity (e.g., whole blood will give an optical density of approximately 0.23), the type
  • 2300751.1 of sample can be verified by determining whether or not that sample has an intensity within an allowed range.
  • the proper introduction of the sample into the device at a correct time can be verified by determining where the sample signal occurs as a function of time (along the x-axis). For instance, the time when the sample reaches the measurement zone (observed in an OD having a certain range or intensity) can be monitored. If the sample takes too long to enter the measurement zone, this could indicate, for example, a leak or a clog in the system. If it takes too long for the sample to reach the first measurement zone or there is too much time between the sample or portions of the sample reaching multiple measurement zones (which may be positioned in parallel or in series), the test may be cancelled.
  • the volume of first fluid which produces signal 110 can be determined and verified by measuring time period 114 of the signal. If the particular process to be performed in the microfluidic device requires a sample having a particular volume, this can be verified. For example, a sample having a particular volume (e.g., 10 ⁇ > may be expected, corresponding to an expected range of flow time (e.g., signal having a certain duration) at a certain intensity (e.g., sample OD). The test may ensure that the user correctly loaded the sample into the fluidic connector or other suitable sample introduction device. If the duration of the sample signal is too short (which may indicate not enough sample was introduced) or too long (which may indicate too much sample was introduced) the test may be cancelled and/or the results disregarded.
  • a sample having a particular volume e.g. 10 ⁇ >
  • an expected range of flow time e.g., signal having a certain duration
  • a certain intensity e.g., sample OD
  • the control system may trigger a secondary process that may, for example, modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system.
  • the control system may determine that since an incorrect sample type or volume was introduce into the device, or introduced into the device at an incorrect time, the analysis to be performed by the microfluidic device should be canceled.
  • cancelation may occur due to a problem with the device (e.g., a clog in the channels that does not allow fluid to flow at a particular flow rate), or a problem with an analyzer used to analyze the device (e.g., the malfunction of one or more components such as a valve, pump, or vacuum).
  • the analysis can be canceled, for example, by modulating fluid flow in the microfluidic system (e.g., sending a signal to a pump or a vacuum to stop the flow of
  • an abnormality occurring in the system triggers a secondary event to occur, but does not cancel the analysis.
  • a user may be alerted that an abnormality has occurred in the system. The user may be informed that results of the test should not be relied upon, that the analysis needs to be performed again, that the analysis may take longer to perform, or that the user should take some action. In some cases, the user can be notified and then asked to verify whether or not one or more processes of the microfluidic system, or the analysis being performed, should be continued. Other methods of quality control are also possible.
  • a method of conducting quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of a microfluidic system includes detecting a first fluid at (e.g., passing across) a first measurement zone of the microfluidic system and forming a first signal corresponding to the first fluid, and transmitting the first signal to a control system.
  • the first signal may be compared to a reference signal, thereby determining the presence of abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system.
  • the method may include determining whether to cease operation of the microfluidic system based at least in part on results of the comparing step.
  • the control system may determine whether or not to stop an analysis or a portion of an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system.
  • the type of fluid passing across a detector can be determined at least in part by the intensity of the signal generated by the fluid.
  • signal 110 from a first fluid has a high intensity (e.g., a low light transmission)
  • a second series of fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124 have a relatively low intensity (e.g., a high light transmission).
  • the plot also indicates the relative separation between the first fluid producing signal 110 and the second fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124.
  • the difference between time period 125 and time period 114 can give an indication of how quickly the second set of fluids is flowed across the detector after the first fluid has finished passing across the detector.
  • this difference in time can be compared with one or more reference signals or values (e.g., a predetermined amount of separation time or time range that is supposed to occur between the first fluid and the second fluids).
  • a difference in time can be compared with one or more reference signals or values (e.g., a predetermined amount of separation time or time range that is supposed to
  • 2300751.1 that does not match the reference signal or value, or fall within an allowable range, can indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the microfluidic system. For example, if the time different between time periods 125 and 114 is too long, this may indicate that fluid flow has been obstructed (e.g., due to a clog in a channel by an air bubble or by other means), but later unobstructed in the microfluidic device. In some embodiments, this could influence the test being performed, and as such, the control system may determine whether or not one or more processes should be ceased or modified in the microfluidic system.
  • second fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124 are separated by peaks 126, 128 and 130. These peaks represent fluids that are flowed between the second fluids. As described in more detail herein, in some cases these separation fluids may be fluids that are immiscible with the fluids they are separating. For example, in one set of embodiments, second fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124 are wash solutions that pass across the measurement zone. These wash fluids may be separated by immiscible (separation) fluids (e.g., plugs of air) that produce signals 126, 128 and 130.
  • immiscible (separation) fluids e.g., plugs of air
  • the wash solutions may have a relatively high transmission, and therefore a relatively low optical density, whereas the plugs of air may have a relatively lower light transmission (e.g., a relatively higher optical density) due to scattering of light as these fluids pass across the detector. Because of the different susceptibility of these fluids to the transmission of light, the different fluids (including the fluid type, phase, volume, flow rate) can be distinguished.
  • the sequence of second fluids passing across the detector may have a time period 134, which may optionally be compared to an optimal time period or time period range and may optionally be used in feedback control.
  • the number of washes (peaks and troughs) is counted and a control system cancels the analysis if the expected number is not observed. Fewer washes could mean the reagents had evaporated during storage of the device (indicating a leak) or a problem in the connection of the fluidic connector. Too few washes could also indicate that the correct number had not been loaded in the device during device manufacture. Too many washes would indicate that the wash plugs had broken up during storage.
  • FIG. 2 also shows a third fluid producing signal 135 passing across the measurement zone after the flowing of the second fluids. Since the third fluid has a
  • the third fluid may be identified or distinguished from other fluids at least in part by its time period 136, which may give an indication of the fluid's volume.
  • the position of time period 136 along the time line (or relative to one or more other signals present) can also give an indication of the fluid being flowed across the measurement zone.
  • the analysis may be designed such that a fluid giving a certain optical density (e.g., -0.01) and duration (e.g., ⁇ 200 seconds at a particular flow rate to be used or pressure to be applied) will occur between 900 seconds and 1200 seconds after the initiation of the analysis. These parameters can be pre-programmed into the control system, and compared with signal 135 measured by the detector.
  • the third fluid producing signal 135 can be any suitable fluid, and in some cases is reagent to be used in a chemical and/or biological reaction to be performed in the microfluidic device.
  • the third fluid may be a detection antibody that may bind with one or more components of the sample. In other embodiments, however, a detection antibody is bound with a component of the sample before the sample flows across the detector. Other configurations of binding a detection antibody are also possible, and in some embodiments, no detection antibody is used at all.
  • a series of fourth fluids producing signals 140, 142, 144, 146, 148 and 150 may flow across the measurement zone.
  • Each of the fourth fluids may be separated by an immiscible fluid (e.g., air plugs) producing signals 154.
  • an immiscible fluid e.g., air plugs
  • the frequency of signals having a certain threshold e.g., air plugs producing signals 154 having a threshold above an optical density of 0.05 and/or a series of fourth fluids having an optical density below 0.01 can be used to trigger one or more events in the microfluidic system.
  • the intensity and frequency of a series of fluids can be combined with a total time period between the first and last of such fluids (e.g., time period 158 encompassing the series of fourth fluids).
  • feedback or the triggering of an event may be based at least in part on the frequency of signals (e.g., peaks) observed in combination with one or more time periods between adjacent signals, and/or in combination with the intensity of the signals, and/or in combination with the time period between the first and last signal of that type or intensity.
  • one or more of the signals can be used in combination with the average position of the signals relative to the
  • the event that is triggered by a pattern of signals is the modulation of fluid flow within the microfluidic system.
  • a pump, vacuum, valving system, or other component can be actuated based at least in part on the presence of absence of a particular pattern of signals.
  • a pattern of signals may trigger the actuation of a valve that allows one or more fluids to flow into a particular channel of the microfluidic device.
  • actuation of the valve may allow two fluids that are kept separate during storage of the fluids in the device to mix in a common channel.
  • a mixed fluid includes an
  • amplification reagent that allows amplification of a signal in a measurement zone of the device. Specific examples are provided in more detail below.
  • a detector may not only detect the passing of fluids across a region of a microfluidic device, but may also detect the presence or absence of an event or condition occurring in a region of the microfluidic device. For example, in some cases a binding event is detected. In other embodiments, the accumulation and/or deposition of a component in a particular region of the microfluidic device is detected. And yet other embodiments, the amplification of a signal is detected. Such processes can occur at any suitable position within a region of a device.
  • the event or condition may occur within a fluid positioned in the region of the device, on a surface of a channel or chamber of the device, on or in a component positioned within the region of the device (e.g., on a surface of a bead, in a gel, on a membrane).
  • the progression of the event or condition can be determined, and, optionally, compared to one or more reference signals or values (which may be pre- programmed into the control system).
  • a peak 160 may form due to the build up of a signal (e.g., an opaque layer) in a measurement zone. This slope of the peak may be measured and compared with one or more control values to determine whether or not a correct process is occurring or has occurred in the measurement zone. For example, if the slope of peak 160 is within a particular range of acceptable values, this may indicate that there were no abnormalities in the storage of reagents that were used in part to produce the signal.
  • peak 160 indicates an amplification reagent entering the measurement zone.
  • the analysis may be designed and configured such that the
  • amplification reagent enters the measurement zone within a certain time period after a certain event takes place (e.g., upon actuation of a valve).
  • the amplification reagent should have a certain optical density associated with it (e.g., a low optical density if the reagent is a clear liquid). If the reagent is late in arriving at the measurement zone and/or or the initial optical density is too high, the test can be cancelled. If the reagent has a high optical density (e.g., it is dark or opaque), this could indicate that the reagent has been spoiled (e.g., during storage of the reagent in the device).
  • a device may include multiple measurement zones (e.g., in parallel or in series).
  • One measurement zone may be used as a negative control. For instance, minimal binding or deposition of a substance (e.g., an opaque layer), and therefore a low optical density in some embodiments, may be expected in the negative control measurement zone. If a detector measures an elevated optical density in the negative control measurement zone, this may indicate, for example, non-specific binding. In some cases, the signal from this measurement zone can be considered
  • background and subtracted from signals in the other measurement zones to account for non-specific binding which may occur throughout the system. If the background is too high, the test may be cancelled. This may, for example, indicate a problem with the amplification reagents or other reagents used in the analysis.
  • a device may include a measurement zone used as a positive control.
  • the positive control may, in some embodiments, include a known amount of analyte bound to the measurement zone (e.g., to the channel walls), and the level of the optical density signals at a certain point in time, the slope of these signals, or the change in slope of these signals in the zone may fall within an expected range. These ranges can be determined during calibration of a specified lot of devices. In some cases, as described in more detail herein, this information may be included in the lot-specific information transferred to an analyzer by use of a lot-specific tag, such as a bar-code, memory stick, or radio-frequency identification (RFID) tag. If the reference levels for these measurement zones fall out of range, the test may be cancelled. Similar to background, these signals can also be used to adjust the test signal (e.g., increasing the test signal slightly if these signals are elevated, decreasing the test signal if these signals are low).
  • RFID radio-frequency identification
  • the presence of obstructions such as bubbles or other components during one or more events (e.g., amplification, mixing) and/or at one or more unexpected positions in time may indicate problems in the analysis, such as a leak in a valve.
  • These bubbles or other components can be detected as peaks having a certain intensity in the optical density pattern (which may be similar to the air plug peaks used during washing). If these are observed in unexpected places, the test can be cancelled.
  • optical density e.g., transmission or absorbance
  • other types of signals can be measured using a suitable detector.
  • the signals may be produced absent a label (such as in measuring optical density), or produced using a label.
  • a variety of different labels can be used, such as fluorescent markers, dyes, quantum dots, magnetic particles, and other labels known in the art.
  • an analysis performed in a device can be recorded to produce essentially a "fingerprint" of the analysis. All or potions of the fingerprint may be used to provide feedback to the microfluidic system.
  • the fingerprint includes signals from the passing of substantially all fluids used in an analysis across a region of the device. Since different fluids used in the analysis may have different volumes, flow rates, compositions, and other characteristics, these properties can be reflected in the fingerprint.
  • the fingerprint can be used to identify, for example, the fluids used in the analysis, the timing of the fluids (e.g., when particular fluids were introduced into certain regions of the device), interaction of the fluids (e.g., mixing).
  • the fingerprint can be used to identify the type of analysis performed in the device and/or the test format (e.g., a sandwich assay versus a competitive assay) of the analysis.
  • the fingerprint as a whole (e.g., the general shape, duration, and timing of all signals) is used to conduct quality control at the end of the analysis. For instance, the fingerprint may be compared with a control fingerprint to determine whether the analysis was run properly after all fluids have been flowed.
  • the control system may, in some cases, notify the user as to whether the analysis was run properly (e.g., via a user interface).
  • a detector may be positioned within certain regions of a microfluidic system and may only determine the presence or passing of certain, but not all, fluids across the detector.
  • a detector may be positioned at a mixing
  • 2300751.1 region to determine proper mixing of fluids. If the fluids are mixed properly (e.g., a mixed fluid having a certain property such as a certain concentration or volume is produced) or mixed at a proper point in time relative to one or more other events occurring in the analysis, feedback control may allow the mixed fluid to flow into another region of the device. If the mixed fluid does not have one or more desired or predetermined characteristics, feedback control may prevent the mixed fluid may flowing into the region and, in some embodiments, may initiate a second set of fluids to be mixed and transported to the region.
  • the fluids are mixed properly (e.g., a mixed fluid having a certain property such as a certain concentration or volume is produced) or mixed at a proper point in time relative to one or more other events occurring in the analysis)
  • feedback control may allow the mixed fluid to flow into another region of the device. If the mixed fluid does not have one or more desired or predetermined characteristics, feedback control may prevent the mixed fluid may flowing into the region and, in some embodiments, may initiate a second set of fluids to
  • feedback control comprises the use of two or more detectors.
  • a first detector may determine a first set of signals
  • a second detector may determine a second set of signals.
  • the first and second set of signals may be compared with one another, and/or each may be compared with a set of reference signals or values which may be pre-programmed into a control system.
  • a device may include a plurality of measurement zones, each measurement zone associated with a detector that measures signals in that region.
  • the system is designed and configured such that a first detector determines a fingerprint of the analysis that substantially matches the fingerprint of the analysis of a second detector. If the fingerprints do not match, however, this may indicate that an abnormality has occurred within the system.
  • the first and/or second detectors may detect the passing of all fluids used in the analysis across a region of the device, or only certain (but not all) fluids passing across a region of the device, as described above.
  • feedback control, or determination of a value in general may involve the use of signals detected from multiple measurement zones. For example, flow rate may be determined by measuring how long it takes a bubble or a leading edge of a fluid to travel between two measurement zones.
  • the microfluidic system includes a device or cassette that may be configured to be inserted in a microfluidic sample analyzer.
  • FIGS. 3-6 illustrate various exemplary embodiments of the cassette 20 for use with an analyzer.
  • the cassette 20 may be substantially card-shaped (i.e.
  • the cassette 20 may be configured to include a fluidic connector 220, which as shown in exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3, may snap into one end of the cassette 20.
  • the fluidic connector can be used to introduce one or more fluids (e.g., a sample or a reagent) into the cassette.
  • the fluidic connector is used to fluidly connect two
  • the cassette may include two channels that are not in fluid communication prior to first use of the cassette.
  • Non-connected channels may be advantageous in certain cases, such as for storing different reagents in each of the channels.
  • a first channel may be used to store dry reagents and a second channel may be used to store wet reagents. Having the channels be physically separated from one another can enhance long-term stability of the reagents stored in each of the channels, e.g., by keeping the reagent(s) stored in dry form protected from moisture that may be produced by reagent(s) stored in wet form.
  • the channels may be connected via the fluidic connector to allow fluid communication between the channels of the cassette.
  • the fluidic connected may puncture seals covering inlets and/or outlets of the cassette to allow insertion of the fluidic connector into the cassette.
  • first use of the cassette means a time or times before the cassette is first used by an intended user after commercial sale.
  • First use may include any step(s) requiring manipulation of the device by a user.
  • first use may involve one or more steps such as puncturing a sealed inlet to introduce a reagent into the cassette, connecting two or more channels to cause fluid communication between the channels, preparation of the device (e.g., loading of reagents into the device) before analysis of a sample, loading of a sample onto the device, preparation of a sample in a region of the device, performing a reaction with a sample, detection of a sample, etc.
  • First use does not include manufacture or other preparatory or quality control steps taken by the manufacturer of the cassette.
  • Those of ordinary skill in the art are well aware of the meaning of first use in this context, and will be able easily to determine whether a cassette of the invention has or has not experienced first use.
  • cassette of the invention are disposable after first use (e.g., after completion of an assay), and it is particularly evident when such devices are first used, because it is typically impractical to use the devices at all (e.g., for performing a second assay) after first use.
  • a cassette may be coupled to a fluidic connector using a variety of mechanisms.
  • the fluidic connector may include at least one non-fluidic feature complementary to a feature of the cassette so as to form a non-fluidic connection between the fluidic connector and the cassette upon attachment.
  • the non-fluidic complementary feature may be, for example, a protruding feature of the fluidic connector and corresponding complementary cavities of the cassette, which can help the user align the fluidic connector with the cassette.
  • the feature creates a substantial resistance to movement of the fluidic connector relative to the cassette and/or alignment element upon the alignment element receiving the fluidic component (e.g., upon insertion of the fluidic component into the alignment element) and/or during intended use of the device.
  • the fluidic connector and/or cassette may optionally include one or more features such as snap features (e.g., indentations), grooves, openings for inserting clips, zip-tie mechanisms, pressure-fittings, friction- fittings, threaded connectors such as screw fittings, snap fittings, adhesive fittings, magnetic connectors, or other suitable coupling mechanisms.
  • Connection of the fluidic connector to the cassette may involve forming a liquid-tight and/or air-tight seal between the components. Attachment of a fluidic connector to a cassette may be reversible or irreversible.
  • the cassette 20 may be configured to include a fluidic connector 220.
  • the cassette 20 may include a fluidic connector alignment element 202 which is configured to receive and mate with the connector 220.
  • the alignment element may be constructed and arranged to engage with the fluidic connector and thereby position the connector in a predetermined, set configuration relative to the cassette.
  • the cassette may include an alignment element that extends approximately perpendicular to the cassette. In other embodiments, the alignment element may extend approximately parallel to the cassette.
  • the configuration of the alignment element and the fluidic connector may be adapted to allow insertion of the fluidic connector into the alignment element by a sliding motion.
  • the fluidic connector may slide against one or more surfaces of the alignment element when the fluidic connector is inserted into the alignment element.
  • the fluidic connector may include a substantially U-shaped channel which may hold a fluid and/or reagent (e.g., a fluid sample) prior to be connected to the cassette.
  • the channel may be housed between two shell components which form the connector.
  • the fluidic connector may be used to collect a sample from the patient prior to the fluidic connector being connected to the cassette.
  • the fluidic connector may be configured to puncture a patient' s finger to collect the sample in the channel.
  • fluid connector does not contain a sample (or reagent) prior to connection to the cassette, but simply allows fluid communication between two or more channels of the cassette upon connection.
  • the U-shaped channel is formed with a capillary tube.
  • the fluidic connector can also include other channel configurations, and in some embodiments, may include more than one channels that may be fluidically connected or unconnected to one another.
  • the cassette 20 may include a cassette body 204 which includes at least one channel 206 configured to receive a sample or reagent.
  • the cassette body 204 may also include latches 208 positioned on one end that interlock with the fluidic connector alignment element 202 for a snap fit.
  • the cassette 20 may also include top and bottom covers 210 and 212, which may, for example, be made of a transparent material.
  • a cover can be in the form of a biocompatible adhesive and can be made of a polymer (e.g., PE, COC, PVC) or an inorganic material for example.
  • one or more covers are in the form of an adhesive film (e.g., a tape).
  • the material and dimensions of a cover are chosen such that the cover is substantially impermeable to water vapor.
  • the cover can be non-adhesive, but may bond thermally to the microfluidic substrate by direct application of heat, laser energy, or ultrasonic energy.
  • any inlet(s) and/or outlet(s) of a channel of the cassette can be sealed (e.g., by placing an adhesive over the inlet(s) and/or outlet(s)) using one or more covers.
  • the cover substantially seals one or more stored reagents in the cassette.
  • the cassette body 204 may include one or more ports 214 coupled to the channel 206 in the cassette body 204. These ports 214 can be configured to align with the substantially U-shaped channel 222 in the fluidic connector 220 when the fluidic connector 220 is coupled to the cassette 20 to fluidly connect the channel 206 in the cassette body 204 with the channel 222 in the fluidic connector 220. As shown, a cover 216 may be provided over the ports 214 and the cover 216 may be configured to be pieced or otherwise opened (e.g., by the connector 220 or by other means) to fluidly
  • a cover 218 may be provided to cover port 219 (e.g., a vacuum port) in the cassette body 204.
  • the port 219 may be configured to fluidly connect a fluid flow source 40 with the channel 206 to move a sample through the cassette.
  • the cover 218 over the port 219 may be configured to be pierced or otherwise opened to fluidly connect the channel 206 with the fluid flow source 40.
  • the cassette body 204 may optionally include a liquid containment region such as a waste area, including an absorbent material 217 (e.g., a waste pad).
  • the liquid containment region includes regions that capture one or more liquids flowing in the cassette, while allowing gases or other fluids in the cassette to pass through the region. This may be achieved, in some embodiments, by positioning one or more absorbent materials in the liquid containment region for absorbing the liquids. This configuration may be useful for removing air bubbles from a stream of fluid and/or for separating hydrophobic liquids from hydrophilic liquids.
  • the liquid containment region prevents liquids from passing through the region.
  • the liquid containment region may act as a waste area by capturing substantially all of the liquid in the cassette, thereby preventing liquids from exiting the cassette (e.g., while allowing gases to escape from an outlet of the cassette).
  • the waste area may be used to store the sample and/or reagents in the cassette after they have passed through the channel 206 during the analysis of the sample.
  • FIG. 5 shows a cassette having a certain configuration of channels and including various components of a microfluidic system for manipulating fluids.
  • FIG. 6 shows another example of a configuration of channels that may be part of a cassette.
  • a cassette may include a first channel 206 and a second channel 207 spaced apart from the first channel.
  • the channels 206, 207 range in largest cross-section dimension from approximately 50 micrometers to approximately 500 micrometers, although other channel sizes and configurations may be used, as described in more detail below.
  • the first channel 206 may include one or more measurement zones used to analyze the sample.
  • the channel 206 may include one or more measurement zones used to analyze the sample.
  • the channel 206 may include one or more measurement zones used to analyze the sample.
  • 2300751.1 includes four measurement zones 209 which are utilized during sample analysis (see FIG. 6).
  • one or more measurement zones are the form of meandering regions (e.g., regions involving meandering channels).
  • a meandering region may, for example, be defined by an area of at least 0.25 mm 2 , at least 0.5 mm 2 , at least 0.75 mm 2 , or at least 1.0 mm 2 , wherein at least 25%, 50%, or 75% of the area of the meandering region comprises an optical detection pathway.
  • a detector that allows measurement of a single signal through more than one adjacent segments of the meandering region may be positioned adjacent the meandering region.
  • the first channel 206 and/or the second channel 207 may be used to store one or more reagents used to process and analyze the sample prior to first use of the cassette.
  • dry reagents are stored in one channel or section of a cassette and wet reagents are stored in a second channel or section of cassette.
  • two separate sections or channels of a cassette may both contain dry reagents and/or wet reagents.
  • Reagents can be stored and/or disposed, for example, as a liquid, a gas, a gel, a plurality of particles, or a film.
  • the reagents may be positioned in any suitable portion of a cassette, including, but not limited to, in a channel, reservoir, on a surface, and in or on a membrane, which may optionally be part of a reagent storage area.
  • a reagent may be associated with a cassette (or components of a cassette) in any suitable manner.
  • reagents may be crosslinked (e.g., covalently or ionically), absorbed, or adsorbed (physisorbed) onto a surface within the cassette.
  • all or a portion of a channel (such as a fluid path of a fluid connector or a channel of the cassette) is coated with an anti-coagulant (e.g., heparin).
  • an anti-coagulant e.g., heparin
  • a liquid is contained within a channel or reservoir of a cassette prior to first use and/or prior to introduction of a sample into the cassette.
  • the stored reagents may include fluid plugs positioned in linear order so that during use, as fluids flow to a reaction site, they are delivered in a predetermined sequence.
  • a cassette designed to perform an assay may include, in series, a rinse fluid, a labeled- antibody fluid, a rinse fluid, and a amplification fluid, all stored therein. While the fluids are stored, they may be kept separated by substantially immiscible separation fluids (e.g., a gas such as air) so that fluid reagents that would normally react with each other when in contact may be stored in a common channel.
  • substantially immiscible separation fluids e.g., a gas such as air
  • Reagents can be stored in a cassette for various amounts of time.
  • a reagent may be stored for longer than 1 hour, longer than 6 hours, longer than 12 hours, longer than 1 day, longer than 1 week, longer than 1 month, longer than 3months, longer than 6 months, longer than 1 year, or longer than 2 years.
  • the cassette may be treated in a suitable manner in order to prolong storage.
  • cassettes having stored reagents contained therein may be vacuum sealed, stored in a dark environment, and/or stored at low temperatures (e.g., below 0 degrees C).
  • the length of storage depends on one or more factors such as the particular reagents used, the form of the stored reagents (e.g., wet or dry), the dimensions and materials used to form the substrate and cover layer(s), the method of adhering the substrate and cover layer(s), and how the cassette is treated or stored as a whole.
  • channels 206 and 207 may not be in fluid communication with each other until the fluidic connector 220 is coupled to the cassette 20.
  • the two channels in some embodiments, are not in fluid communication with one another prior to first use and/or prior to introduction of a sample into the cassette.
  • the substantially U-shaped channel 222 of the connector 220 may fluidly connect the first and second channels 206, 207 such that the reagents in the second channel 207 can pass through the U-shaped channel 22 and selectively move into the measurement zones 209 in the first channel 206.
  • the two channels 206 and 207 are in fluid communication with one another prior to first use, and/or prior to introduction of a sample into the cassette, but the fluidic connector further connects the two channels (e.g., to form a closed-loop system) upon first use.
  • a cassette described herein may include one more microfluidic channels, although such cassettes are not limited to microfluidic systems and may relate to other types of fluidic systems.
  • Microfluidic refers to a cassette, device, apparatus or system including at least one fluid channel having a maximum cross-sectional dimension of less than 1 mm, and a ratio of length to largest cross-sectional dimension of at least 3:1.
  • a "microfluidic channel,” as used herein, is a channel meeting these criteria.
  • cross-sectional dimension e.g., a diameter
  • Most fluid channels in components of cassettes described herein have maximum cross-sectional dimensions less than 2 mm
  • all fluid channels of a cassette are microfluidic or have a largest cross sectional dimension of no more than 2 mm or 1 mm.
  • the maximum cross-sectional dimension of the channel(s) are less than 500 microns, less than 200 microns, less than 100 microns, less than 50 microns, or less than 25 microns.
  • the dimensions of the channel may be chosen such that fluid is able to freely flow through the article or substrate.
  • the dimensions of the channel may also be chosen, for example, to allow a certain volumetric or linear flowrate of fluid in the channel.
  • the number of channels and the shape of the channels can be varied by any suitable method known to those of ordinary skill in the art. In some cases, more than one channel or capillary may be used.
  • a channel may include a feature on or in an article (e.g., a cassette) that at least partially directs the flow of a fluid.
  • the channel can have any suitable cross-sectional shape (circular, oval, triangular, irregular, square or rectangular, or the like) and can be covered or uncovered. In embodiments where it is completely covered, at least one portion of the channel can have a cross-section that is completely enclosed, or the entire channel may be completely enclosed along its entire length with the exception of its inlet(s) and outlet(s).
  • a channel may also have an aspect ratio (length to average cross sectional dimension) of at least 2:1, more typically at least 3:1, 5:1, or 10:1 or more.
  • Cassettes described herein may include channels or channel segments positioned on one or two sides of the cassette.
  • the channels are formed in a surface of the cassette.
  • the channel segments may be connected by an intervening channel passing through the cassette.
  • the channel segments are used to store reagents in the device prior to first use by an end user.
  • the specific geometry of the channel segments and the positions of the channel segments within the cassettes may allow fluid reagents to be stored for extended periods of time without mixing, even during routine handling of the cassettes such as during shipping of the cassettes, and when the cassettes are subjected to physical shock or vibration.
  • a cassette includes optical elements that are fabricated on one side of a cassette opposite a series of fluidic channels.
  • An "optical element” is used to refer to a feature formed or positioned on or in an article or cassette that is provided for and used to change the direction (e.g., via refraction or reflection), focus,
  • an optical element may comprise a lens (e.g., concave or convex), mirror, grating, groove, or other feature formed or positioned in or on a cassette.
  • the optical elements may guide incident light passing through the cassette such that most of the light is dispersed away from specific areas of the cassette, such as intervening portions between the fluidic channels. By decreasing the amount of light incident upon these intervening portions, the amount of noise in a detection signal can be decreased when using certain optical detection systems.
  • the optical elements comprise triangular grooves formed on or in a surface of the cassette.
  • the draft angle of the triangular grooves may be chosen such that incident light normal to the surface of the cassette is redirected at an angle dependent upon the indices of refraction of the external medium (e.g., air) and the cassette material.
  • one or more optical elements are positioned between adjacent segments of a meandering region of a measurement zone.
  • a cassette can be fabricated of any material suitable for forming a channel.
  • materials include polymers (e.g., polyethylene, polystyrene, polymethylmethacrylate, polycarbonate, poly(dimethylsiloxane), PTFE, PET, and a cyclo-olefin copolymer), glass, quartz, and silicon.
  • the material forming the cassette and any associated components may be hard or flexible.
  • Suitable material(s) based upon e.g., its rigidity, its inertness to (e.g., freedom from degradation by) a fluid to be passed through it, its robustness at a temperature at which a particular device is to be used, its
  • the material used may include a thermoplastic (e.g.,
  • polypropylene polycarbonate, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene, nylon 6
  • an elastomer e.g., polyisoprene, isobutene-isoprene, nitrile, neoprene, ethylene-propylene, hypalon, silicone
  • a thermoset e.g., epoxy, unsaturated polyesters, phenolics
  • the material and dimensions (e.g., thickness) of a cassette and/or cover are chosen such that it is substantially impermeable to water vapor.
  • a cassette designed to store one or more fluids therein prior to first use may include a cover comprising a material known to provide a high vapor barrier, such as metal foil, certain polymers, certain ceramics and combinations thereof.
  • the material is chosen based at least in part on the shape and/or configuration of the cassette. For instance, certain materials can be used to form planar devices whereas other materials are more suitable for forming devices that are curved or irregularly shaped.
  • a cassette is comprised of a combination of two or more materials, such as the ones listed above.
  • channels of the cassette may be formed in polystyrene or other polymers (e.g., by injection molding) and a biocompatible tape may be used to seal the channels.
  • the biocompatible tape or flexible material may include a material known to improve vapor barrier properties (e.g., metal foil, polymers or other materials known to have high vapor barriers), and may optionally allow access to inlets and outlets by puncturing or unpeeling the tape.
  • a variety of methods can be used to seal a microfluidic channel or portions of a channel, or to join multiple layers of a device, including but not limited to, the use of adhesives, use adhesive tapes, gluing, bonding, lamination of materials, or by mechanical methods (e.g., clamping, snapping mechanisms, etc.).
  • a cassette comprises a combination of two or more separate layers (or cassettes) mounted together.
  • Independent channel networks such as sections 71 and 77 of FIG. 1A
  • the separate layers may be mounted together by any suitable means, such as by the methods described herein, to form a single cassette.
  • two or more channel networks are connected fluidically at first use, e.g., by use of a fluidic connector.
  • two or more channel networks are connected fluidically prior to first use.
  • a cassette described herein may have any suitable volume for carrying out an analysis such as a chemical and/or biological reaction or other process.
  • the entire volume of a cassette includes, for example, any reagent storage areas, measurement zones, liquid containment regions, waste areas, as well as any fluid connectors, and fluidic channels associated therewith.
  • small amounts of reagents and samples are used and the entire volume of the fluidic device is, for example, less than 10 mL, 5 mL, 1 mL, 500 ⁇ ⁇ , 250 ⁇ ⁇ , 100 ⁇ ⁇ , 50 ⁇ ⁇ , 25 ⁇ ⁇ , 10 ⁇ ⁇ , 5 ⁇ ⁇ , or 1 ⁇ ⁇ .
  • a cassette described herein may be portable and, in some embodiments, handheld.
  • the length and/or width of the cassette may be, for example, less than or equal to 20 cm, 15 cm, 10 cm, 8 cm, 6 cm, or 5 cm.
  • the thickness of the cassette may be, for example, less than or equal to 5cm, 3 cm, 2 cm, 1 cm, 8 mm, 5 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, or 1 mm.
  • portable devices may be suitable for use in point-of-care settings.
  • cassettes and their respective components described herein are exemplary and that other configurations and/or types of cassettes and components can be used with the systems and methods described herein.
  • an analysis involves a chemical and/or biological reaction.
  • a chemical and/or biological reaction involves binding. Different types of binding may take place in cassettes described herein. Binding may involve the interaction between a corresponding pair of molecules that exhibit mutual affinity or binding capacity, typically specific or non-specific binding or interaction, including biochemical, physiological, and/or pharmaceutical interactions. Biological binding defines a type of interaction that occurs between pairs of molecules including proteins, nucleic acids, glycoproteins, carbohydrates, hormones and the like. Specific examples include antibody/antigen, antibody/hapten, enzyme/substrate, enzyme/inhibitor,
  • Binding may also occur between proteins or other components and cells.
  • devices described herein may be used for other fluid analyses (which may or may not involve binding and/or reactions) such as detection of components, concentration, etc.
  • a heterogeneous reaction may take place in a cassette; for example, a binding partner may be associated with a surface of a channel, and the complementary binding partner may be present in the fluid phase.
  • Other solid-phase assays that involve affinity reaction between proteins or other biomolecules (e.g., DNA, RNA, carbohydrates), or non-naturally occurring molecules, can also be performed.
  • Non-limiting examples of typical reactions that can be performed in a cassette include
  • Non- limiting examples of analytes that can be determined (e.g., detected) using cassettes described herein include specific proteins, viruses, hormones, drugs, nucleic acids and polysaccharides; specifically antibodies, e.g., IgD, IgG, IgM or IgA immunoglobulins to HTLV-I, HIV, Hepatitis A, B and non A/non B, Rubella, Measles, Human Parvovirus B19, Mumps, Malaria, Chicken Pox or Leukemia; human and animal hormones, e.g., thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), thyroxine (T4), luteinizing hormone (LH), follicle-stimulating hormones (FSH), testosterone, progesterone, human chorionic gonadotropin, estradiol; other proteins or peptides, e.g.
  • TSH thyroid stimulating hormone
  • T4 thyroxine
  • LH luteinizing hormone
  • FSH follicle-stimul
  • troponin I troponin I
  • c-reactive protein myoglobin, brain natriuretic protein
  • prostate specific antigen PSA
  • free-PSA complexed-PSA
  • pro-PSA EPCA-2
  • PCADM-1 ABCA5, hK2, beta-MSP (PSP94)
  • AZGP1 Annexin A3, PSCA, PSMA, JM27, PAP
  • drugs e.g., paracetamol or theophylline
  • marker nucleic acids e.g., PCA3, TMPRS-ERG
  • polysaccharides such as cell surface antigens for HLA tissue typing and bacterial cell wall material.
  • Chemicals that may be detected include explosives such as TNT, nerve agents, and environmentally hazardous compounds such as polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), dioxins, hydrocarbons and MTBE.
  • Typical sample fluids include physiological fluids such as human or animal whole blood, blood serum, blood plasma, semen, tears, urine, sweat, saliva, cerebro- spinal fluid, vaginal secretions; in-vitro fluids used in research or environmental fluids such as aqueous liquids suspected of being contaminated by the analyte.
  • one or more reagents that can be used to determine an analyte of a sample is stored in a channel or chamber of a cassette prior to first use in order to perform a specific test or assay.
  • a corresponding antibody or aptamer can be the binding partner associated with a surface of a microfluidic channel. If an antibody is the analyte, then an appropriate antigen or aptamer may be the binding partner associated with the surface.
  • a disease condition it may be preferred to put the antigen on the surface and to test for an antibody that has been produced in the subject.
  • Such antibodies may include, for example, antibodies to HIV.
  • a cassette is adapted and arranged to perform an analysis involving accumulating an opaque material on a region of a microfluidic channel
  • An opaque material may include a substance that interferes with the transmittance of light at one or more wavelengths.
  • An opaque material does not merely refract light, but reduces the amount of transmission through the material by, for example, absorbing or reflecting light.
  • Different opaque materials or different amounts of an opaque material may allow transmittance of less than, for example, 90, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, 10 or 1 percent of the light illuminating the opaque material.
  • Examples of opaque materials include molecular layers of metal (e.g., elemental metal), ceramic layers, polymeric layers, and layers of an opaque substance (e.g., a dye).
  • the opaque material may, in some cases, be a metal that can be electrolessly deposited. These metals may include, for example, silver, copper, nickel, cobalt, palladium, and platinum.
  • An opaque material that forms in a channel may include a series of discontinuous independent particles that together form an opaque layer, but in one embodiment, is a continuous material that takes on a generally planar shape.
  • the opaque material may have a dimension (e.g., a width of length) of, for example, greater than or equal to 1 micron, greater than or equal to 5 microns, greater than 10 microns, greater than or equal to 25 microns, or greater than or equal to 50 microns. In some cases, the opaque material extends across the width of the channel (e.g., a measurement zone) containing the opaque material.
  • the opaque layer may have a thickness of, for example, less than or equal to 10 microns, less than or equal to 5 microns, less than or equal to 1 micron, less than or equal to 100 nanometers or less than or equal to 10 nanometers. Even at these small thicknesses, a detectable change in transmittance can be obtained.
  • the opaque layer may provide an increase in assay sensitivity when compared to techniques that do not form an opaque layer.
  • a cassette described herein is used for performing an immunoassay (e.g., for human IgG or PSA) and, optionally, uses silver enhancement for signal amplification.
  • an immunoassay e.g., for human IgG or PSA
  • binding between the human IgG and anti-human IgG can take place.
  • One or more reagents which may be optionally stored in a channel of the device prior to use, can then flow over this binding pair complex.
  • One of the stored reagents may include a solution of metal colloid (e.g., a gold conjugated antibody) that specifically binds to the antigen to be detected (e.g., human IgG).
  • This metal colloid can provide a catalytic surface for the deposition of an opaque material
  • the layer of metal can be formed by using a two component system: a metal precursor (e.g., a solution of silver salts) and a reducing agent (e.g., hydroquinone, chlorohydroquinone, pyrogallol, metol, 4-aminophenol and phenidone), which can optionally be stored in different channels prior to use.
  • a metal precursor e.g., a solution of silver salts
  • a reducing agent e.g., hydroquinone, chlorohydroquinone, pyrogallol, metol, 4-aminophenol and phenidone
  • the silver salt and reducing solutions can merge at a channel intersection, where they mix (e.g., due to diffusion) in a channel, and then flow over the analysis region. Therefore, if antibody- antigen binding occurs in the analysis region, the flowing of the metal precursor solution through the region can result in the formation of an opaque layer, such as a silver layer, due to the presence of the catalytic metal colloid associated with the antibody- antigen complex.
  • the opaque layer may include a substance that interferes with the
  • An opaque layer that is formed in the channel can be detected optically, for example, by measuring a reduction in light transmittance through a portion of the analysis region (e.g., a serpentine channel region) compared to a portion of an area that does not include the antibody or antigen.
  • a portion of the analysis region e.g., a serpentine channel region
  • a signal can be obtained by measuring the variation of light transmittance as a function of time, as the film is being formed in an analysis region.
  • the opaque layer may provide an increase in assay sensitivity when compared to techniques that do not form an opaque layer.
  • various amplification chemistries that produce optical signals (e.g., absorbance, fluorescence, glow or flash chemiluminescence, electrochemiluminescence), electrical signals (e.g., resistance or conductivity of metal structures created by an electroless process) or magnetic signals (e.g., magnetic beads) can be used to allow detection of a signal by a detector.
  • fluids may be introduced into the cassette at first use, and/or stored within the cassette prior to first use.
  • Fluids include liquids such as solvents, solutions and suspensions. Fluids also include gases and mixtures of gases.
  • the fluids may be separated by another fluid that is preferably substantially immiscible in each of the first two fluids. For example, if a channel contains two different aqueous solutions, a separation plug of a third fluid may be substantially immiscible in both of the aqueous solutions.
  • substantially immiscible fluids that can be used as separators may
  • 2300751.1 include gases such as air or nitrogen, or hydrophobic fluids that are substantially immiscible with the aqueous fluids. Fluids may also be chosen based at least in part on the fluid's reactivity with adjacent fluids. For example, an inert gas such as nitrogen may be used in some embodiments and may help preserve and/or stabilize any adjacent fluids.
  • An example of an substantially immiscible liquid for separating aqueous solutions is perfluorodecalin. The choice of a separator fluid may be made based on other factors as well, including any effect that the separator fluid may have on the surface tension of the adjacent fluid plugs.
  • Separator fluids may also be inert to a reaction site (e.g., measurement zone) to which the fluids will be supplied.
  • a reaction site e.g., measurement zone
  • a separator fluid such as air or nitrogen may have little or no effect on the binding partner.
  • the use of a gas (e.g., air) as a separator fluid may also provide room for expansion within a channel of a fluidic device should liquids contained in the device expand or contract due to changes such as temperature (including freezing) or pressure variations.
  • a cassette may be configured to operate with an analyzer in some embodiments.
  • the cassette shown illustratively in FIG. 5 may have a cammed surface along a side portion of the cassette.
  • the cammed surface includes a notch 230 formed at one end of the cassette.
  • the other end of the cassette includes a curved surface 232.
  • This cammed surface of the cassette may be configured to interact with a sample analyzer such that the analyzer can detect the presence of the cassette within the housing of the analyzer and/or position the cassette within the analyzer.
  • FIG. 7 shows an example of an analyzer 301 that may be configured to receive a cassette.
  • the analyzer may include a fluid flow source 40 (e.g., a pressure-control system) which may be fluidly connected to the channels 206, 207, 222 (e.g., of FIG. 6) to pressurize the channels to move the sample and/or other reagents through the channels.
  • the fluid flow source 40 may be configured to move a sample and/or reagent initially from the substantially U-shaped channel 222 into the first channel 206.
  • the fluid flow source 40 may also be used to move the reagents in the second channel 207 through the substantially U-shaped channel 222 and into the first channel 206.
  • the fluid flow source 40 may be configured to move the fluids into the absorbent material 217 of the cassette 200.
  • the fluid flow source is a vacuum system. It should be understood, however, that other sources of fluid flow such as valves, pumps, and/or other components can be used.
  • Analyzer 301 may be used in a variety of ways to process and analyze a sample placed within the analyzer.
  • the identification reader reads and identifies information associated with the cassette 20.
  • the analyzer 301 may be configured to compare the information to data stored in a control system to ensure that it has calibration information for this particular sample (such as a calibration curve or expected values for any measurements made during an assay).
  • the analyzer may output a request to the user to upload the specific information needed. This information can be uploaded using, for example, the same identification reader which reads the cassette information. It could also be uploaded using a separate identification reader or by some other method.
  • the analyzer may also be configured to review expiration date information associated with the cassette and cancel the analysis if the expiration date has passed.
  • a fluid flow source such as a vacuum manifold may be configured to contact the cassette to ensure a fluid-tight seal around a vacuum port and vent ports of the cassette.
  • an optical system may take initial measurements to obtain reference readings. Such reference readings may be taken both with light sources (e.g., 82, 86 of FIG. 7) activated and deactivated.
  • fluid flow source 40 e.g., a vacuum system
  • fluid flow source 40 may be activated, which may rapidly change the pressure within the channel 206, 207 (e.g., reduced to approximately -30kPa). This reduction of pressure within the channel may drive the sample into the channel 206 and through each of the measurement zones 209A-209D (see FIG. 6). After the sample reaches the final measurement zone 209D, the sample may continue to flow into the liquid containment region 217.
  • the microfluidic sample analyzer 301 is used to measure the level of a prostate specific antigen (PSA) in a blood sample.
  • PSA prostate specific antigen
  • four measurement zones 209A-209D may be utilized to analyze the sample.
  • a first measurement zone the walls of the channel may be blocked with a blocking protein (such as Bovine Serum Albumin) such that little or no proteins in the blood sample attach to the walls of the measurement zone 209 (except for perhaps some non-specific binding which may be washed off).
  • This first measurement zone may act as a negative control.
  • the walls of the channel 206 may be coated with a predetermined large quantity of a prostate specific antigen (PSA) to act as a high or positive control.
  • PSA prostate specific antigen
  • the blood sample passes through the second measurement zone 209, little or no PSA proteins in the blood may bind to the walls of the channel.
  • Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may be dissolved from inside of the fluidic connector tube 222 or may be flowed from any other suitable location. These antibodies may not yet be bound to the PSA in the sample, and thus they may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a high or positive control.
  • the walls of the channel 206 may be coated with a predetermined small quantity of PSA to act as a low control.
  • PSA protein-binding protein
  • Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may be dissolved from inside of the fluidic connector tube 222 (which are not yet bound to the PSA in the sample) or may be flowed from any other suitable location, and may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a low control.
  • the walls of the channel 206 may be coated with the capture antibody, an anti-PSA antibody, which binds to a different epitope on the PSA protein than the gold conjugated signal antibody.
  • PSA proteins in the blood sample may bind to the anti-PSA antibody in a way that is proportional to the concentration of these proteins in the blood.
  • the first three measurement zones 209 may act as controls and the fourth measurement zone 209 may actually test the sample.
  • measurements from a region that analyzes the sample can be used not only to determine the concentration of an analyte in a sample, but also as a control as well.
  • a threshold measurement can be established at an early phase of amplification.
  • 2300751.1 of analyte is outside the desired range for the assay.
  • This technique may be used to identify, for example, whether a High Dose Hook Effect is taking place during the analysis, i.e., when a very high concentration of analyte gives an artificially low reading.
  • different numbers of measurement zones can be provided, and an analysis may optionally include more than one measurement zones that actually test the sample. Additional measurement zones can be used to measure additional analytes so that the system can perform multiplex assays simultaneously with a single sample.
  • the start of this analysis may be calculated when the pressure within the channel 206 is
  • the optical system 80 is measuring the light transmission for each measurement zone, and in one embodiment, this data may be transmitted to a control system approximately every 0.1 seconds. Using reference values, these measurements may be converted using the following formulas:
  • Id the intensity of transmitted light through a measurement zone with the light source off
  • lr a reference intensity (i.e. the intensity of the transmitted light at a measurement zone with the light source activated, or before the start of an analysis when only air is in the channel and
  • the optical density in a measurement zone 209 may be calculated.
  • fluid control can also be performed at least in part by
  • control of fluid flow can be achieved based at least in part on the influence of channel geometry and the viscosity of one or more fluids (which may be stored) inside the cassette.
  • One method includes flowing a plug of a low viscosity fluid and a plug of a high viscosity fluid in a channel including a flow constriction region and a non-constriction region.
  • the low viscosity fluid flows at a first flow rate in the channel and the flow rate is not substantially affected by the fluid flowing in the flow constriction region.
  • the flow rates of the fluids decrease substantially, since the flow rates, in some systems, are influenced by the highest viscosity fluid flowing in the smallest cross-sectional area of the system (e.g., the flow constriction region). This causes the low viscosity fluid to flow at a second, slower flow rate than its original flow rate, e.g., at the same flow rate at which the high viscosity fluid flows in the flow constriction region.
  • one method of controlling fluid flow may involve flowing a first fluid from a first channel portion to a second channel portion in a microfluidic system, wherein a fluid path defined by the first channel portion has a larger cross-sectional area than a cross-sectional area of a fluid path defined by the second channel portion, and flowing a second fluid in a third channel portion in the microfluidic system in fluid communication with the first and second channel portions, wherein the viscosity of the first fluid is different than the viscosity of the second fluid, and wherein the first and second fluids are substantially incompressible.
  • a volumetric flow rate of the first and second fluids may be decreased by a factor of at least 3, at least 10, at least 20, at least 30, at least 40, or at least 50 in the microfluidic system as a result of the first fluid flowing from the first channel portion to the second channel portion, compared to the absence of flowing the first fluid from the first channel portion to the second channel portion.
  • a chemical and/or biological interaction involving a component of the first or second fluids may take place at a first measurement zone in fluid communication with the channel portions while the first and second fluids are flowing at the decreased flow rate.
  • a fluid can be made to speed up or slow down at different locations within the system without the use of valves and/or without external control.
  • the length of the channel portions can be chosen to allow a fluid to remain in a particular area of the system for a certain period of time.
  • Such systems are particularly useful for performing chemical and/or biological assays, as well as other applications in which timing of reagents is important.
  • any suitable fluid flow source may be used to promote or maintain fluid flow in a microfluidic system or cassette described herein.
  • the fluid flow source is part of a microfluidic sample analyzer.
  • a fluid flow source may be configured to pressurize a channel in a cassette to move a sample through the channel.
  • the fluid flow source is a vacuum system and includes a vacuum source or pump, two vacuum reservoirs which may be separated by a vacuum regulator and a manifold to provide a fluid connection between the vacuum reservoirs and the cassette.
  • the manifold may also include one or more fluid connections to one or more ports on the cassette.
  • the manifold may provide a fluidic connection between a port and a valve (such as a solenoid valve). Opening and closing this valve may control where air can enter the cassette, thus serving as a vent valve in certain embodiments.
  • the vacuum source is a pump, such as a solenoid operated diaphragm pump.
  • fluid flow may be driven/controlled via use of other types of pumps or sources of fluid flow.
  • a syringe pump may be used to create a vacuum by pulling the syringe plunger in an outward direction.
  • a positive pressure is applied to one or more inlets of the cassette to provide a source of fluid flow.
  • fluid flow takes place while applying a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop (i.e., AP) across an inlet and an outlet of a cassette.
  • a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop i.e., AP
  • an entire analysis is performed while applying a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop (i.e., AP) across an inlet and an outlet of a cassette.
  • a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop can be achieved, for example, by applying a positive pressure at the inlet or a reduced pressure (e.g., a vacuum) at the outlet.
  • a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop is achieved while fluid flow
  • a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop may be present across, for example, an inlet to a measurement zone (which may be connected to a fluidic connector) and an outlet downstream of the measurement zone (e.g., an outlet downstream of a liquid containment region), respectively.
  • a vacuum source is configured to pressurize a channel to approximately -60kPa (approximately 2/3 atmosphere). In another embodiment, the vacuum source is configured to pressurize a channel to approximately -30kPa. In certain embodiments, a vacuum sources is configured to pressurize a channel to, for example, between -lOOkPa and -70kPa, between -70kPa and -50kPa, between -50kPa and -20kPa, or between -20kPa and -lkPa.
  • two vacuum reservoirs may be provided.
  • the pump may be turned on such that the first reservoir may be pressurized to approximately -60kPa.
  • a regulator positioned between the reservoirs may ensure that the second reservoir may only be pressurized to a different pressure, for example, approximately -30kPa.
  • This regulator may maintain the pressure of a reservoir at -30kPa (or at another suitable pressure) as long as the other reservoir remains at a certain pressure range, e.g., between -60kPa and -30kPa.
  • Pressure sensors may monitor the pressure within each reservoir. If the pressure in the first reservoir reaches a set point (for example, approximately -40kPa), the pump may be actuated to decrease the pressure in the first reservoir.
  • the second reservoir may be configured to detect any leaks in the overall vacuum system.
  • the vacuum system may include a filter coupled to the reservoirs.
  • a solenoid valve may serve as a vent valve connected through the manifold to a port.
  • a fluid flow source that is a part of the analyzer may be coupled to the cassette to ensure a fluid- tight connection.
  • the cassette may include a port configured to couple a channel of the cassette with the fluid source, and optionally to another channel of the cassette.
  • seals, or o-rings are positioned around the port and a linear solenoid may be positioned above the o-rings to press and seal the o-rings against the cassette body.
  • a manifold adapter may be positioned between the linear solenoid and
  • the manifold, and passive return springs may be provided around the manifold to urge the manifold away from the cassette body when the solenoid is not charged.
  • multiple ports on the cassette may interface with the manifold.
  • the cassette may also include one or more venting ports and/or mixing ports. The interface between each port and the manifold may be independent (e.g., there may be no fluidic connection inside the manifold).
  • one or more channels in the cassette may be pressurized (e.g., to approximately -30kPa) which may drive the fluids within the channel (e.g., both fluid sample as well as reagents) toward the outlet.
  • a vent valve connected to the vent port through a manifold may initially be open which may enable all of the reagents downstream of the mixing port to move toward the outlet, but will not cause reagents upstream of the mixing port to move. Once the vent valve is closed, reagents upstream of the mixing port may move toward a mixing port and then to the outlet.
  • fluids can be stored serially in a channel upstream of the mixing port, and after closing a vent valve positioned along the channel, the fluids can flow sequentially towards the channel outlet.
  • fluids can be stored in separate, intersecting channels, and after closing a vent valve the fluids will flow together toward a point of intersection.
  • This set of embodiments can be used, for example, to controllably mix the fluids as they flow together.
  • the timing of delivery and the volume of fluid delivered can be controlled, for example, by the timing of the vent valve actuation.
  • vent valves can be operated without constricting the cross- section of the microfluidic channel on which they operate, as might occur with certain valves in the prior art. Such a mode of operation can be effective in preventing leaking across the valve.
  • vent valves can be used, some systems and methods described herein do not require the use of certain internal valves, which can be problematic due to, for example, their high expense, complexity in fabrication, fragility, limited compatibility with mixed gas and liquid systems, and/or unreliability in microfluidic systems.
  • vent valves are described, other types of valving mechanisms can be used with the systems and methods described herein.
  • valves include a diaphragm valve, ball valve, gate valve, butterfly valve, globe valve, needle valve, pinch valve, poppet valve, or pinch valve.
  • the valving mechanism may be actuated by any suitable means, including a solenoid, a motor, by hand, by electronic actuation, or by hydraulic/pneumatic pressure.
  • all of the liquids in the cassette may move into the liquid containment area which may include an absorbent material.
  • the absorbent material absorbs only liquids such that gases may flow out of the cassette through the outlet.
  • Determination techniques may include optically-based techniques such as light transmission, light absorbance, light scattering, light reflection and visual techniques. Determination techniques may also include luminescence techniques such as photoluminescence (e.g., fluorescence), chemiluminescence, bioluminescence, and/or electrochemiluminescence. In other embodiments, determination techniques may measure conductivity or resistance. As such, an analyzer may be configured to include such and other suitable detection systems.
  • the measurement of transmission or absorbance means that light can be detected at the same wavelength at which it is emitted from a light source.
  • the light source can be a narrow band source emitting at a single wavelength it may also may be a broad spectrum source, emitting over a range of wavelengths, as many opaque materials can effectively block a wide range of wavelengths.
  • a system may be operated with a minimum of optical devices (e.g., a simplified optical detector).
  • the determining device may be free of a photomultiplier, may be free of a wavelength selector such as a grating, prism or filter, may be free of a device to direct or columnate light such as a columnator, or may be free of magnifying optics (e.g., lenses).
  • a wavelength selector such as a grating, prism or filter
  • a device to direct or columnate light such as a columnator
  • magnifying optics e.g., lenses
  • Elimination or reduction of these features can result in a less expensive, more robust device.
  • an optical system is positioned in the housing of an analyzer.
  • an optical system 80 includes at least a first
  • the first light source 82 may be configured to pass light through a first measurement zone of the cassette 20 when the cassette is inserted into the analyzer 301.
  • the first detector 84 may be positioned opposite the first light source 82 to detect the amount of light that passes through the first measurement zone of the cassette.
  • the optical system includes ten light sources and ten detectors. It should be appreciated that in other embodiments, the number of light sources and detectors may vary as the invention is not so limited.
  • the cassette may include a plurality of measurement zones and the cassette may be positioned within the analyzer such that each measurement zone aligns with a light source and corresponding detector.
  • the light source includes an optical aperture which may help direct light from the light source to a particular region within a measurement zone of the cassette.
  • the light sources are light emitting diodes (LED's) or laser diodes.
  • LED light emitting diodes
  • an InGaAlP red semiconductor laser diode emitting at 654 nm may be used.
  • Other light sources can also be used.
  • the light source may be positioned within a nest or housing.
  • the nest or housing may include a narrow aperture or thin tube that may assist in collimating light.
  • the light sources may be positioned above where the cassette is inserted into the analyzer such that the light source shines down onto the top surface of the cassette. Other suitable configurations of the light source with respect to the cassette are also possible.
  • the wavelength of the light sources may vary as the invention is not so limited.
  • the wavelength of the light source is approximately 670 nm, and in another embodiment, the wavelength of the light source is approximately 650 nm.
  • the wavelength of each light source may be different such that each measurement zone of the cassette receives a different light wavelength. In one particular embodiment when measuring hemocrit or hemoglobin, an isobestic wavelength range between
  • approximately 590 nm and approximately 805 nm may be used for at least one of the measurement zones.
  • a detector 84 may be spaced apart from and positioned below a light source to detect the amount of light that passes through the cassette.
  • one or more of the detectors are photodetectors (e.g., photodiodes).
  • the photodetector may be any suitable device capable of detecting
  • One type of photodetector is an optical integrated circuit (IC) including a photodiode having a peak sensitivity at 700 nm, an amplifier and a voltage regulator.
  • the detector may be positioned within a nest or housing which may include a narrow aperture or thin tube to ensure that only light from the center of the measurement zone is measured at the detector.
  • the photodetector may include a filter to remove the effect of light that is not at the selected frequency.
  • the light source used for each measurement zone can be modulated at a frequency sufficiently different from that of its neighboring light source.
  • the each detector can be configured (e.g., using software) to select for its attributed light source, thereby avoiding interfering light form neighboring optical pairs.
  • a cassette may include a measurement zone which includes a meandering channel configured and arranged to align with a detector such that upon alignment, the detector can measure a single signal through more than one adjacent segment of the meandering channel.
  • the detector is able to detect a signal within at least a portion of the area of the meandering channel and through more than one segment of the meandering channel such that a first portion of the signal, measured from a first segment of the meandering channel, is similar to a second portion of the signal, measured from a second segment of the meandering channel.
  • the signal is present as a part of more than one segment of the meandering channel, there is no need for precise alignment between a detector and a measurement zone.
  • a cassette comprising a meandering region can be placed in a slot of an analyzer described herein (e.g., in a cavity having the same or similar shape as the cassette), and the measurement zone can be automatically located in a beam of light of the detector. Possible causes of misalignment caused by, for instance, cassette -to- cassette variations, the exact location
  • the meandering region can stay within the beam of light and detection is not interrupted due to these variations.
  • the detector may detect a signal within all, or a portion, of a measurement zone (e.g., including a meandering region). In other words, different amounts of the meandering region may be used as an optical detection pathway. For instance, the detector may detect a signal within at least 15% of the measurement zone, at least 20% of the measurement zone, at least 25% of the measurement zone, within at least 50% of the measurement zone, or within at least 75% of the measurement zone (but less than 100% of the measurement zone).
  • the area in which the measurement zone is used as an optical detection pathway may also depend on, for instance, the opacity of the material in which the channel is fabricated (e.g., whether all, or, a portion, of the channel is transparent), the amount of a non- transparent material that may cover a portion of the channel (e.g., via use of a protective cover), and/or the size of the detector and the measurement zone.
  • the opacity of the material in which the channel is fabricated e.g., whether all, or, a portion, of the channel is transparent
  • the amount of a non- transparent material that may cover a portion of the channel e.g., via use of a protective cover
  • the size of the detector and the measurement zone may also depend on, for instance, the opacity of the material in which the channel is fabricated (e.g., whether all, or, a portion, of the channel is transparent), the amount of a non- transparent material that may cover a portion of the channel (e.g., via use
  • a signal produced by a reaction carried out in the cassette is homogenous over the entire measurement zone (e.g., over an entire meandering channel region). That is, the measurement zone (e.g., meandering channel region) may allow production and/or detection of a single, homogenous signal in said region upon carrying out a chemical and/or biological reaction (e.g., and upon detection by a detector).
  • the meandering channel Prior to carrying out a reaction in the meandering channel region, the meandering channel may include, for example, a single species (and concentration of species) to be
  • the species may be adsorbed to a surface of the meandering channel.
  • the signal may be homogeneous over only portions of the meandering region, and one or more detectors may detect different signals within each of the portions.
  • more than one measurement zone can be connected in series and each measurement zone can be used to detect/determine a different species. It should be understood that while meandering regions are described, measurement zones that do not include meandering regions can also be used.
  • the amount of light transmitted through a measurement zone of the cassette may be used to determine information about not only the sample, but also information about specific processes occurring in the fluidic system of the cassette (e.g., mixing of reagents, flow rate, etc.). In some cases, measurement of
  • 2300751.1 light through a region can be used as feedback to control fluid flow in the system, as described herein.
  • optical density of a fluid is determined. It should be recognized that a clear liquid (such as water) may allow a large amount of light to be transmitted from the light source, through a measurement zone and to a detector. Air within the measurement zone may lead to less light transmitted through the measurement zone because more light may scatter within the channel compared to when a clear liquid is present. When a blood sample is in a measurement zone, a significantly less amount of light may pass through to the detector due to the light scattering off of blood cells and also due to absorbance.
  • silver associates with a sample component bound to a surface within the measurement zone and as silver builds up within the measurement zone, less and less light is transmitted through the measurement zone.
  • measuring the amount of light that is detected at each detector enables a user to determine which reagents are in a particular measurement zone at a particular point in time. It is also recognized that by measuring the amount of light that is detected with each detector, it is possible to measure the amount of silver deposited in each measurement zone. This amount may correspond to the amount of analyte captured during a reaction which may thus provide a measure of the
  • an optical system may be used for a variety of quality control reasons.
  • the time it takes for a sample to reach a measurement zone where the optical system detects the light that passes though the measurement zone may be used to determine whether there is a leak or clog in the system.
  • the sample is expected to be a certain volume, for example, approximately 10 microliters, there is an expected flow time which would be associated for the sample to pass through the channels and measurement zones. If the sample falls outside of that expected flow time, it could be an indication that there is not enough sample to conduct the analysis and/or that the wrong type of sample was loaded into the analyzer.
  • an expected range of results may be determined based upon the type of sample (e.g., serum, blood, urine, etc.) and if the sample is outside of the expected range, it could be an indication of an error.
  • an optical system includes a plurality of light sources and a plurality of corresponding detectors.
  • a first light source is adjacent a first light source
  • the first light source is configured to pass light though a first measurement zone of a cassette and the second light source is configured to pass light through a second measurement zone of the cassette.
  • the light sources are configured such that the second light source is not activated unless the first light source is deactivated. Applicant has recognized that some light from one light source may spread over to an adjacent detector and may affect the amount of light detected at the adjacent detector. In one set of embodiments, if the adjacent light source is activated at the same time as the first light source, then both detectors are also measuring the amount of light that passes through the first and second measurement zones of the cassette at the same time, which may lead to inaccurate measurements.
  • the plurality of light sources are configured to activate sequentially with only one light source activated at a time.
  • the corresponding detector for the activated light source is thus only detecting the amount of light that passes through the corresponding measurement zone.
  • the light sources are configured to each activate for a short period of time (e.g., at least approximately 500, 250, 100, or 50 microseconds, or, in some embodiments, less than or equal to approximately 500, 250, 100, or 50 microseconds), and then an adjacent light source is configured to activate for a similar time frame. Activation for 100
  • microseconds corresponds to a rate of 10 kHz.
  • a multiplexed analog to digital converter is used to pulse the light and measure the amount of light detected at each corresponding detector every 500, 250, 100, or 50 microseconds. Pulsing the light in this manner may help to prevent stray light passing through one measurement zone to alter the amount of light detected that passes through an adjacent measurement zone.
  • an analyzer includes a temperature regulating system positioned within the housing which may be configured to regulate the temperature within the analyzer.
  • the sample may need to be kept within a certain temperature range.
  • the temperature regulating system includes a heater configured to heat the cassette.
  • the heater is a resistive heater which may be positioned on the underside of where the cassette is placed in the analyzer.
  • the temperature regulating system also includes a thermistor to measure the temperature of the cassette and a controller circuit may be provided to control the temperature.
  • the passive flow of air within the analyzer may act to cool the air within the analyzer if needed.
  • a fan (not shown) may optionally be provided in the analyzer to lower the temperature within the analyzer.
  • the temperature regulating system may include Peltier thermoelectric heaters and/or coolers within the analyzer.
  • an identification system including one or more identifiers is used and associated with one or more components or materials associated with a cassette and/or analyzer.
  • the "identifiers,” as described in greater detail below, may themselves be “encoded with” information (i.e. carry or contain information, such as by use of an information carrying, storing, generating, or conveying device such as a radio frequency identification (RFID) tag or bar code) about the component including the identifier, or may not themselves be encoded with information about the component, but rather may only be associated with information that may be contained in, for example, a database on a computer or on a computer readable medium (e.g., information about a user, and/or sample to be analyzed). In the latter instance, detection of such an identifier can trigger retrieval and usage of the associated information from the database.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • Identifiers "encoded with" information about a component need not necessarily be encoded with a complete set of information about the component.
  • an identifier may be encoded with information merely sufficient to enable a unique identification of the cassette (e.g. relating to a serial no., part no., etc.), while additional information relating to the cassette (e.g. type, use (e.g., type of assay), ownership, location, position, connectivity, contents, etc.) may be stored remotely and be only associated with the identifier.
  • Information about” or “information associated with” a cassette, material, or component, etc. is information regarding the identity, positioning, or location of the cassette, material or component or the identity, positioning, or location of the contents of a cassette, material or component and may additionally include information regarding the nature, state or composition of the cassette, material, component or contents.
  • "Information about” or “information associated with” a cassette, material or component or its contents can include information identifying the cassette, material or component or its contents and distinguishing the cassette, material, component or its contents from others.
  • “information about” or “information associated with” a cassette, material or component or its contents may refer to information indicating the type or what the cassette, material or component or its contents is, where it is or should be located, how it is or should be positioned, the function or purpose of the cassette, material or component or its contents, how the cassette, material or component or its contents is to be connected with other components of the system, the lot number, origin, calibration information, expiration date, destination, manufacturer or ownership of the cassette, material or component or its contents, the type of analysis/assay to be performed in the cassette, information about whether the cassette has been
  • an identifier is associated with a cassette and/or analyzer described herein.
  • the term “identifier” refers to an item capable of providing information about the cassette and/or analyzer (e.g.
  • identifiers include radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, bar codes, serial numbers, color tags, fluorescent or optical tags (e.g., using quantum dots), chemical compounds, radio tags, magnetic tags, among others.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • an analyzer may include an identification reader positioned within the housing configured to read information about with the cassette. Any suitable identification reader that can be used to read information from an identifier.
  • identification readers include RFID readers, bar code scanners, chemical detectors, cameras, radiation detectors, magnetic or electric field detectors, among others.
  • the method of detection/reading and appropriate type of identification detector depends on the particular identifier utilized and can include, for example, optical imaging, fluorescence excitation and detection, mass spectrometry, nuclear magnetic resonance, sequencing, hybridization, electrophoresis, spectroscopy, microscopy, etc.
  • the identification readers may be mounted or pre-embedded in specific locations (e.g., on or within a cassette and/or analyzer).
  • the identification reader is an RFID reader configured to read an RFID identifier associated with the cassette.
  • the analyzer includes an RFID module and antenna that are configured to read information from the cassette inserted into the analyzer.
  • the identification reader is a barcode reader configured to read a barcode associated with the cassette. Once the cassette is inserted into the analyzer, the identification reader may read the information from the cassette.
  • the identifier on the cassette may include one or more of the types of information such as cassette type, type of analysis/assay to be performed, lot number, information about whether the cassette has been used/analyzed, and other information described herein.
  • the reader may also be configured to read information provided with a group of cassettes, such as in a box of cassettes, such as, but not limited to calibration information, expiration date, and any additional information specific to that lot.
  • the information identified may be optionally displayed to a user, e.g., to confirm that a correct cassette and/or type of assay is being performed.
  • the identification reader may be integrated with a control system via communication pathways. Communication between the identification readers and the control system may occur along a hard-wired network or may be transmitted wirelessly.
  • the control system can be programmed to recognize a specific identifier (e.g., of a cassette associated with information relating to a cassette type, manufacturer, assay to be performed, etc.) as indicating the cassette is suitably connected or inserted within a particular type of analyzer.
  • the identifier of a cassette be associated with predetermined or programmed information contained in a database regarding the use of the system or cassette for a particular purpose, user or product, or with particular reaction conditions, sample types, reagents, users, and the like. If an incorrect match is detected or an identifier has been deactivated, the process may be halted or the system may be rendered not operable until the user has been notified, or upon acknowledgement by a user.
  • the information from or associated with an identifier can, in some embodiments, be stored, for example in computer memory or on a computer readable medium, for future reference and record-keeping purposes.
  • certain control systems may employ information from or associated with identifiers to identify which components
  • 2300751.1 e.g., cassettes
  • type of cassettes were used in a particular analysis, the date, time, and duration of use, the conditions of use, etc.
  • Such information may be used, for example, to determine whether one or more components of the analyzer should be cleaned or replaced.
  • a control system or any other suitable system could generate a report from gathered information, including information encoded by or associated with the identifiers, that may be used in providing proof of compliance with regulatory standards or verification of quality control.
  • Information encoded on or associated with an identifier may also be used, for example, to determine whether the component associated with the identifier (e.g., a cassette) is authentic or counterfeit. In some embodiments, the determination of the presence of a counterfeit component causes system lockout.
  • the identifier may contain a unique identity code. In this example, the process control software or analyzer would not permit system startup (e.g., the system may be disabled) if a foreign or mismatched identity code (or no identity code) was detected.
  • the information obtained from or associated with an identifier can be used to verify the identity of a customer to whom the cassette and/or analyzer is sold or for whom a biological, chemical, or pharmaceutical process is to be performed.
  • the information obtained from or associated with an identifier is used as part of a process of gathering data for troubleshooting a system.
  • the identifier may also contain or be associated with information such as batch histories, assembly process and instrumentation diagrams (P and IDs), troubleshooting histories, among others. Troubleshooting a system may be accomplished, in some cases, via remote access or include the use of diagnostic software.
  • an analyzer includes a user interface, which may be positioned within the housing and configured for a user to input information into the sample analyzer.
  • the user interface includes a touch screen.
  • the touch screen may guide a user through the operation of the analyzer, providing text and/or graphical instructions for use of the analyzer.
  • the user interface may guide the user to input the patient's name or other patient identification source/number into the analyzer. Any suitable patient information such as name, date of birth, and/or patient ID number may be inputted into the touch screen user interface to identify the patient.
  • the user interface may indicate the amount of time remaining to complete the analysis of the sample.
  • the user interface may be configured differently, such as with an LCD display and a single button scroll through menu.
  • the user interface may simply include a start button to activate the analyzer.
  • the user interface from separate independent devices (such as a smart phone or mobile computer) can be used to interface with the analyzer.
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram 300 that illustrates how a control system 305 (see FIG. 7) may be operatively associated with a variety of different components according to one embodiment.
  • Control systems described herein can be implemented in numerous ways, such as with dedicated hardware or firmware, using a processor that is programmed using microcode or software to perform the functions recited above or any suitable combination of the foregoing.
  • a control system may control one or more operations of a single analysis (e.g., for a biological, biochemical or chemical reaction), or of multiple (separate or interconnected) analyses.
  • control system 305 may be positioned within the housing 101 of the analyzer and may be configured to communicate with the identification reader 60, the user interface 200, the fluid flow source 40, the optical system 80, and/or the temperature regulating system to analyze a sample in the cassette.
  • the control system includes at least two processors, including a real time processor that controls and monitors all of the sub-systems which directly interface with the cassette.
  • this processor communicates with a second higher level processor which communicates with the user through the user interface and/or the communication subsystem (discussed below) and directs the operation of the analyzer (e.g., determines when to start analyzing a sample and interprets the results).
  • communication between these two processors occurs through a serial communication bus.
  • the analyzer may only include one processor, or more than two processors, as the invention is not so limited.
  • the analyzer is capable of interfacing with external devices and may, for example, include ports for connection with one or more external communication units. External communication may be accomplished, for example, via USB communication.
  • the analyzer may output the results of a sample analysis to a USB printer 400, or to a computer 402.
  • the data stream produced by the real time processor may be outputted to a
  • a computer may be able to directly control the analyzer through a USB connection as well.
  • other types of communication options are available as the present invention is not limited in this respect. For example, Ethernet, Bluetooth and/or WI-FI communication 406 with the analyzer may be established through the processor.
  • calculation methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements described herein may be implemented using a computer implemented control system, such as the various embodiments of computer implemented systems described below.
  • the methods, steps, systems, and system elements described herein are not limited in their implementation to any specific computer system described herein, as many other different machines may be used.
  • the computer implemented control system can be part of or coupled in operative association with a sample analyzer, and, in some embodiments, configured and/or programmed to control and adjust operational parameters of the sample analyzer, as well as analyze and calculate values, as described above.
  • the computer implemented control system can send and receive reference signals to set and/or control operating parameters of the sample analyzer and, optionally, other system apparatus.
  • the computer implemented system can be separate from and/or remotely located with respect to the sample analyzer and may be configured to receive data from one or more remote sample analyzer apparatus via indirect and/or portable means, such as via portable electronic data storage devices, such as magnetic disks, or via communication over a computer network, such as the Internet or a local intranet.
  • a computer implemented control system may include several known components and circuitry, including a processing unit (i.e., processor), a memory system, input and output devices and interfaces (e.g., an interconnection mechanism), as well as other components, such as transport circuitry (e.g., one or more busses), a video and audio data input/output (I O) subsystem, special-purpose hardware, as well as other components and circuitry, as described below in more detail.
  • the computer system may be a multi-processor computer system or may include multiple computers connected over a computer network.
  • the computer implemented control system may include a processor, for example, a commercially available processor such as one of the series x86, Celeron and Pentium processors, available from Intel, similar devices from AMD and Cyrix, the 680X0 series
  • a processor for example, a commercially available processor such as one of the series x86, Celeron and Pentium processors, available from Intel, similar devices from AMD and Cyrix, the 680X0 series
  • a processor typically executes a program called an operating system, of which WindowsNT, Windows 95 or 98, UNIX, Linux, DOS, VMS, MacOS and OS8 are examples, which controls the execution of other computer programs and provides scheduling, debugging, input/output control, accounting, compilation, storage assignment, data management and memory management, communication control and related services.
  • the processor and operating system together define a computer platform for which application programs in high-level programming languages are written.
  • the computer implemented control system is not limited to a particular computer platform.
  • the computer implemented control system may include a memory system, which typically includes a computer readable and writeable non-volatile recording medium, of which a magnetic disk, optical disk, a flash memory and tape are examples.
  • a recording medium may be removable, for example, a floppy disk, read/write CD or memory stick, or may be permanent, for example, a hard drive.
  • Such a recording medium stores signals, typically in binary form (i.e., a form interpreted as a sequence of one and zeros).
  • a disk e.g., magnetic or optical
  • Such signals may define a software program, e.g., an application program, to be executed by the microprocessor, or information to be processed by the application program.
  • the memory system of the computer implemented control system also may include an integrated circuit memory element, which typically is a volatile, random access memory such as a dynamic random access memory (DRAM) or static memory (SRAM).
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SRAM static memory
  • the processor causes programs and data to be read from the non- volatile recording medium into the integrated circuit memory element, which typically allows for faster access to the program instructions and data by the processor than does the non-volatile recording medium.
  • the processor generally manipulates the data within the integrated circuit memory element in accordance with the program instructions and then copies the manipulated data to the non-volatile recording medium after processing is completed.
  • At least part of such a memory system described above may be used to store one or more data structures (e.g., look-up tables) or equations described above.
  • at least part of the non- volatile recording medium may store at least part of a database that includes one or more of such data structures.
  • a database may be any of a variety of types of databases, for example, a file system including one or more flat-file data structures where data is organized into data units separated by delimiters, a relational database where data is organized into data units stored in tables, an object- oriented database where data is organized into data units stored as objects, another type of database, or any combination thereof.
  • the computer implemented control system may include a video and audio data
  • An audio portion of the subsystem may include an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter, which receives analog audio information and converts it to digital information.
  • the digital information may be compressed using known compression systems for storage on the hard disk to use at another time.
  • a typical video portion of the I/O subsystem may include a video image compressor/decompressor of which many are known in the art. Such compressor/decompressors convert analog video information into compressed digital information, and vice- versa.
  • the compressed digital information may be stored on hard disk for use at a later time.
  • the computer implemented control system may include one or more output devices.
  • Example output devices include a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, liquid crystal displays (LCD) and other video output devices, printers, communication devices such as a modem or network interface, storage devices such as disk or tape, and audio output devices such as a speaker.
  • CTR cathode ray tube
  • LCD liquid crystal displays
  • audio output devices such as a speaker.
  • the computer implemented control system also may include one or more input devices.
  • Example input devices include a keyboard, keypad, track ball, mouse, pen and tablet, communication devices such as described above, and data input devices such as audio and video capture devices and sensors.
  • the computer implemented control system is not limited to the particular input or output devices described herein.
  • the computer implemented control system may include specially programmed, special purpose hardware, for example, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC).
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • Such special-purpose hardware may be configured to implement one or more of the methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements described above as part of the computer implemented control system described above or as an independent component.
  • the computer implemented control system and components thereof may be programmable using any of a variety of one or more suitable computer programming languages.
  • Such languages may include procedural programming languages, for example, C, Pascal, Fortran and BASIC, object-oriented languages, for example, C++, Java and Eiffel and other languages, such as a scripting language or even assembly language.
  • the methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements may be implemented using any of a variety of suitable programming languages, including procedural programming languages, object-oriented programming languages, other languages and combinations thereof, which may be executed by such a computer system. Such methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements can be implemented as separate modules of a computer program, or can be implemented individually as separate computer programs. Such modules and programs can be executed on separate computers.
  • Such methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements may be implemented as a computer program product tangibly embodied as computer-readable signals on a computer-readable medium, for example, a non- volatile recording medium, an integrated circuit memory element, or a combination thereof.
  • a computer program product may comprise computer- readable signals tangibly embodied on the computer-readable medium that define instructions, for example, as part of one or more programs, that, as a result of being executed by a computer, instruct the computer to perform the method, step, simulation, algorithm, system, or system element.
  • FIG. 9 includes a schematic illustration of a microfluidic system 500 of a cassette used in this example.
  • the cassette had a similar shape to cassette 20 shown in FIG. 3.
  • the microfluidic system used in this example is generally described in International Patent Publication No. WO2005/066613 (International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2004/043585), filed December 20, 2004 and entitled "Assay Device and Method," which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.
  • the microfluidic system included measurement zones 510A-510D, waste containment region 512, and an outlet 514.
  • the measurement zones included a microfluidic channel 50 microns deep and 120 microns wide, with a total length of 175 mm.
  • the microfluidic system also included microfluidic channel 516 and channel branches 518 and 520 (with inlets 519 and 521, respectively). Channel branches 518 and 520 were 350 microns deep and 500 microns wide.
  • Channel 516 was formed of subchannels 515, which were 350 microns deep and 500 microns wide located on alternating
  • FIG. 9 shows that reagents were stored on a single side of the cassette, in other embodiments, reagents were stored on both sides of the cassette.
  • Channel 516 had a total length of 390 mm, and branches 518 and 520 were each 360 mm long.
  • anti-PSA antibodies were attached to a surface of the microfluidic system in a segment of the measurement zone 510.
  • the microfluidic system Prior to first use, the microfluidic system was loaded with liquid reagents which were stored in the cassette.
  • a series of 7 wash plugs 523-529 (either water of buffer, approximately 2 microliters each) were loaded using a pipette into sub-channels 515 of channel 516 using the thru-holes. Each of the wash plugs was separated by plugs of air.
  • Fluid 528 containing a solution of silver salt, was loaded into branching channel through port 519 using a pipette.
  • Fluid 530 containing a reducing solution, was loaded into branching channel 520 through port 521.
  • Each of the liquids shown in FIG.9 were separated from the other liquids by plugs of air.
  • Ports 514, 519, 521, 536, 539, and 540 were sealed with an adhesive tape that can be easily removed or pierced. As such, the liquids were stored in the microfluidic system prior to first use.
  • the ports 514, 519, 521, 536, 539, and 540 were unsealed by a user peeling off a tape covering the opening of the ports.
  • the tube was part of a fluid connector having a shape and configuration shown in FIG. 3. This created a fluidic connection between measurement zone 510 and channel 516, which were otherwise unconnected and not in fluid communication with one another prior to first use.
  • the cassette including microfluidic system 500 was inserted into an opening of an analyzer (e.g., as shown in FIG. 7).
  • the housing of the analyzer included an arm positioned within the housing that was configured to engage a cammed surface on the cassette.
  • the arm extended at least partially into the opening in the housing such that as the cassette was inserted into the opening, the arm was pushed away from the opening into a second position allowing the cassette to enter the opening.
  • the cassette was positioned and retained within the housing of the analyzer, and the bias of the spring prevented the cassette from slipping out of the analyzer.
  • the analyzer senses the cassette's insertion by means of a position sensor.
  • An identification reader positioned within the housing of the analyzer was used to read an RFID tag on the cassette which includes lot identification information.
  • the analyzer used this identifier to match lot information (e.g., calibration information, expiration date of the cassette, verification that the cassette is new, and the type of analysis/assay to be performed in the cassette) stored in the analyzer.
  • lot information e.g., calibration information, expiration date of the cassette, verification that the cassette is new, and the type of analysis/assay to be performed in the cassette
  • the user was prompted to input information about the patient (from which the sample was acquired) into the analyzer using the touch screen. After the information about the cassette was verified by the user, the control system initiated the analysis.
  • the control system included programmed instructions to perform the analysis.
  • a signal was sent to the electronics controlling a vacuum system, which was a part of the analyzer and used to provide fluid flow.
  • a manifold with o-rings was pressed against the cassette surface by a solenoid.
  • This port on the manifold was connected by a tube to a simple solenoid valve (SMC V124A-6G-M5, not shown) which was open to the atmosphere.
  • SMC V124A-6G-M5 simple solenoid valve
  • a vacuum of approximately -30 kPa was applied to port 514.
  • the channel including measurement zone 510 positioned between ports 540 and 514 had a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop of approximately -30 kPa.
  • Sample 522 was flowed in the direction of arrow 538 into each of measurement zones 510A-510D. As the fluid passed through the measurement zones, the PSA proteins in sample 522 were captured by anti-PSA antibodies immobilized on the measurement zone walls, as described in more detail below. The sample took about 7-8 minutes to pass through the measurement zone, after which it was captured in the waste containment region 512.
  • Initiation of the analysis also involved the control system sending a signal to the optical detectors, which were positioned adjacent each of measurement zones 510, to initiate detection.
  • Each of the detectors associated with the measurement zones recorded the transmission of light through the channels of the measurement zones, as shown in a plot 600 illustrated in FIG. 10.
  • peaks 610A-610D were produced.
  • the peaks (and troughs) measured by the detectors are signals (or are converted to signals) that are sent to the control system which compared the measured signals to reference signals or values pre-programmed into the control system.
  • the control system included a pre-programmed set of instructions for
  • a first measurement zone 510-A of device 500 of FIG. 9 the walls of the channel of this measurement zone were blocked with a blocking protein (Bovine Serum Albumin) prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device). Little or no proteins in the blood sample attached to the walls of the measurement zone 510-A (except for perhaps some non-specific binding which may be washed off). This first measurement zone acted as a negative control.
  • a blocking protein Bovine Serum Albumin
  • a second measurement zone 510-B the walls of the channel of this measurement zone were coated with a predetermined large quantity of a prostate specific antigen (PSA) prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device) to act as a high or positive control.
  • PSA prostate specific antigen
  • Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may not yet be bound to the PSA in the sample, and thus they may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a high or positive control.
  • a third measurement zone 510-C the walls of the channel of this measurement zone were coated with a predetermined low quantity of PSA prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device) to act as a low control.
  • a predetermined low quantity of PSA prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device) to act as a low control.
  • the blood sample flowed through this measurement zone little or no PSA proteins in the sample bind to the wall of the channel.
  • Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a low control.
  • the measurement zone were coated with the capture antibody, an anti-PSA antibody, which binds to a different epitope on the PSA protein than the gold conjugated signal antibody.
  • the walls were coated prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device).
  • PSA proteins in the blood sample bound to the anti-PSA antibody in a way that is proportional to the concentration of these proteins in the blood. Since the sample, which included PSA, also included gold-labeled anti-PSA antibodies coupled to the PSA, the PSA captured on the measurement zone walls formed a sandwich immunocomplex.
  • wash fluids 523-529 followed the sample through the measurement zones 510 towards waste containment region 512 in the direction of arrow 538. As the wash fluids
  • each of the detectors associated with the measurement zones measures a pattern 620 of peaks and troughs.
  • the troughs corresponded to the wash plugs (which are clear liquids and thus provide maximum light transmission).
  • the peaks between each plug represent the air between each plug of clear liquid. Since the assay included 7 wash plugs, 7 troughs and 7 peaks are present in plot 600.
  • the first trough 622 is generally not as deep as the other troughs 624 since the first wash plug often catches blood cells left in the channel and thus is not completely clear.
  • the final peak of air 628 is much longer than the previous peaks because there were no wash plugs to follow.
  • a detector detects the length of this air peak, one or more signals is sent to the control system which compares the length of time of this peak to a pre-set reference signal or input value having a particular length. If the length of time of the measured peak is long enough compared to the reference signal, the control system sends a signal to the electronics controlling vent valve 536 to actuate the valve and initiate mixing of fluids 528 and 530.
  • the signal of peak of air 628 may be combined with a signal indicating either 1) the intensity of the peak; 2) where this peak is positioned as a function of time, and/or 3) one or more signals indicating that a series of peaks 620 of particular intensity has already passed. In this way, the control system distinguishes peak of air 628 from other peaks of long duration such as peak 610 from the sample, e.g., using a pattern of signals.
  • vent port 536 To initiate mixing, the solenoid connected by the manifold to vent port 536 is closed. Since the vacuum remains on and no air can enter through vent valve 536, air enters the device through ports 519 and 521 (which are open). This forces the two fluids 528 and 530 in the two storage channels upstream of vent valve 536 to move substantially simultaneously toward outlet 514. These reagents mix at the intersection of the channels to form an amplification reagent (a reactive silver solution) having a viscosity of about lxlO "3 Pa s. The ratio of the volumes of fluids 528 and 530 was about 1:1. The amplification reagent continued through the downstream storage channel, through tube 544, through measurement zones 510, and then to waste containment region
  • vent valve 536 After a set amount of time (12 seconds), the analyzer reopened vent valve 536 such that air flows through vent valve 536 (instead of the vent ports). This left some reagent behind in the upstream storage channels 518 and 520 on the device. This also results in a single plug of mixed amplification reagent. The 12 seconds of vent-valve closure results in an amplification plug of approximately 50 ⁇ ⁇ . (Instead of simple timing, another way to trigger the re-opening of the vent valve would be to detect the amplification reagent as it first enters the measurement zones.)
  • the mixing was performed less than a minute before use in measurement zone 510.
  • the amplification reagent is a clear liquid, so when it enters the measurement zones, optical density is at its lowest.
  • silver was deposited on the captured gold particles to increase the size of the colloids to amplify the signal.
  • gold particles were present in the low and high positive control measurement zones and, to the extent that PSA was present in the sample, in the test measurement zone.
  • Silver can then be deposited on top of the already deposited silver, leaving more and more silver deposited in the measurement zones.
  • the deposited silver reduces the transmission of light through the measurement zones.
  • the reduction in transmitted light is proportional to the amount of silver deposited and can be related to the amount of gold colloids captured on the channel walls.
  • the negative control for example, or the test area when the sample contains none of the target protein, such as PSA
  • the slope and ultimate level of the pattern of increasing optical density will be high.
  • the analyzer monitors the pattern of this optical density during amplification in the test area to determine the concentration of analyte in the sample. In one version of the test, the pattern is monitored within the first three minutes of amplification.
  • the analyzer stops the test. No more optical measurements are recorded and the manifold is disengaged from the device.
  • the test result is displayed on the analyzer screen and communicated to a printer, computer, or
  • the user may remove the device from the analyzer and throw it away.
  • the sample and all the reagents used in the assay remain in the device.
  • the analyzer is ready for another test.
  • the control of the flow rates of the fluids within channel 516 and the measurement zone 510 were important when flowing fluids through the system. Due to the measurement zone's relatively small cross sectional area, it served as a bottleneck, controlling the overall flow rate in the system. When the measurement zone contained liquids, the linear flow rates of the fluids in channel 516 was about 0.5 mm s 1 . Fluids flowing from branching channels 518 and 520 into main channel 516 might not have mixed reproducibly at this rate, as one fluid might have flowed faster than the other, causing unequal portions of fluids 528 and 530 to be mixed.
  • the microfluidic system shown in FIG. 9 was designed such that the volume of the channel between vent valve 536 and measurement zone 510 was larger than the expected volume of the mixed activated silver solution (i.e., the combined portion of fluids 528 and 530 which traveled into channel 516 while vent valve 536 was closed). This ensured that substantially all of the mixing took place at a relatively high linear flow rate (since no liquid, and only air, was present in the measurement zone 510 at this time), and before the activated solution reached the measurement zone. This configuration helped promote reproducible and equal mixing. For the assay described in this example, it was important to sustain a flow of the activated silver mixture within the measurement zone for a few minutes (e.g., 2 to 10 minutes).
  • This example shows that analysis of a sample in a microfluidic system of a cassette can be performed by using an analyzer that controls fluid flow in the cassette, and by using feedback from one or more measured signals to modulate fluid flow.

Abstract

Systems and methods for controlling fluids in microfluidic systems are generally described. In some embodiments, control of fluids involves the use of feedback from one or more processes or events taking place in the microfluidic system. For instance, a detector may detect one or more fluids at a measurement zone of a microfluidic system and one or more signals, or a pattern of signals, may be generated corresponding to the fluid(s). In some cases, the signal or pattern of signals may correspond to an intensity, a duration, a position in time relative to a second position in time or relative to another process, and/or an average time period between events. Using this data, a control system may determine whether to modulate subsequent fluid flow in the microfluidic system. In some embodiments, these and other methods can be used to conduct quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system.

Description

FEEDBACK CONTROL IN MICROFLUIDIC SYSTEMS
FIELD
Systems and methods for controlling fluids in microfluidic systems are generally described. In some embodiments, control of fluids involves the use of feedback from one or more processes or events taking place in the microfluidic system.
BACKGROUND
The manipulation of fluids plays an important role in fields such as chemistry, microbiology and biochemistry. These fluids may include liquids or gases and may provide reagents, solvents, reactants, or rinses to chemical or biological processes.
While various microfluidic methods and devices, such as microfluidic assays, can provide inexpensive, sensitive and accurate analytical platforms, fluid manipulations— such as the mixture of multiple fluids, sample introduction, introduction of reagents, storage of reagents, separation of fluids, collection of waste, extraction of fluids for off- chip analysis, and transfer of fluids from one chip to the next— can add a level of cost and sophistication. Accordingly, advances in the field that could reduce costs, simplify use, provide quality control of the analysis being performed, and/or improve fluid manipulations in microfluidic systems would be beneficial.
SUMMARY
Systems and methods for controlling fluids in microfluidic systems are generally described. In some embodiments, control of fluids involves the use of feedback from one or more processes or events taking place in the microfluidic system. The subject matter of the present invention involves, in some cases, interrelated products, alternative solutions to a particular problem, and/or a plurality of different uses of one or more systems and/or articles.
In one set of embodiments, a series of methods are provided. In one
embodiment, a method comprises initiating detection of fluids at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system. The method involves detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at the first measurement zone and forming a first signal corresponding to the first fluid and a second signal corresponding to the second fluid. A first pattern of signals is transmitted to a control system, the first pattern of signals comprising at least two of: a)
2300751.1 an intensity of the first signal; b) a duration of the first signal; c) a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time; and d) an average time period between the first and second signals. The method also involves determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system based at least in part on the first pattern of signals.
In another embodiment, a method comprises detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system, wherein the detection step comprises detecting at least two of a) an opacity of the first fluid; b) a volume of the first fluid; c) a flow rate of the first fluid; d) a position of the detection of the first fluid in time relative to a second position in time; and e) an average time period between the detection of the first and second fluids. The method involves determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system based at least in part on the detection step.
In another embodiment, a method of conducting quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of a microfluidic system comprises detecting a first fluid at a first measurement zone of the microfluidic system and forming a first signal
corresponding to the first fluid. The method also involves transmitting the first signal to a control system, comparing the first signal to a reference signal, thereby determining the presence of abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system, and determining whether to stop an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system based at least in part on results of the comparing step.
Other advantages and novel features of the present invention will become apparent from the following detailed description of various non-limiting embodiments of the invention when considered in conjunction with the accompanying figures.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Non-limiting embodiments of the present invention will be described by way of example with reference to the accompanying figures, which are schematic and are not intended to be drawn to scale. In the figures, each identical or nearly identical component illustrated is typically represented by a single numeral. For purposes of clarity, not every component is labeled in every figure, nor is every component of each embodiment of the invention shown where illustration is not necessary to allow those of ordinary skill in the art to understand the invention. In the figures:
2300751.1 FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a microfluidic system and a variety of components that may be part of a sample analyzer according to one embodiment;
FIG. 2 is a plot showing measurement of optical density as a function of time according to one embodiment;
FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a cassette and fluidic connector according to one embodiment;
FIG. 4 is a an exploded assembly view of a cassette according to one embodiment;
FIG. 5 is a schematic view of a cassette according to one embodiment;
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a microfluidic system of a cassette and fluidic connector according to one embodiment;
FIG. 7 is a schematic view of a portion of a sample analyzer according to one embodiment;
FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a control system of a sample analyzer associated with a variety of different components according to one embodiment;
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a microfluidic system of a cassette according to one embodiment; and
FIG. 10 is a plot showing measurement of optical density as a function of time according to one embodiment.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
Systems and methods for controlling fluids in microfluidic systems are generally described. In some embodiments, control of fluids involves the use of feedback from one or more processes or events taking place in the microfluidic system. For instance, a detector may detect one or more fluids passing across a measurement zone of a microfluidic system and one or more signals, or a pattern of signals, may be generated corresponding to the fluid(s). In some cases, the signal or pattern of signals may correspond to an intensity (e.g., an indication of the type of fluid passing across the detector), a duration (e.g., an indication of the volume and/or flow rate of fluid), a position in time relative to another position in time or relative to another process that has occurred in the microfluidic system (e.g., when a certain fluid passes across the detector after a valve has been actuated), and/or an average time period between events (e.g., between two consecutive signals). Using this data, a control system may determine
2300751.1 whether to modulate subsequent fluid flow in the microfluidic system. In some embodiments, these and other methods can be used to conduct quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system.
As described in more detail below, in some embodiments an analysis performed in a device can be recorded to produce essentially a "fingerprint" of the analysis, and all or potions of the fingerprint may be used to provide feedback to the microfluidic system. For example, a fingerprint of an analysis may include signals from each fluid at (e.g., passing across, through, above, below, etc.) a detector or multiple detectors, which may be statically positioned at a measurement zone or at multiple measurement zones of a device. The signals may be a measurement of, for example, the transmission of light passing through the fluids. Since different fluids used in the analysis may have different volumes, flow rates, compositions, and other characteristics, the fluids may produce signals having different intensities and durations, which are reflected in the fingerprint. As such, the fingerprint can be used to identify, for example, the fluids used in the analysis, the timing of the fluids (e.g., when particular fluids were introduced into certain regions of the device), and the interaction between the fluids (e.g., mixing). This data can be used to provide feedback to modulate subsequent fluid flow in the microfluidic system, and in some cases, to conduct quality control to determine whether all or portions of the analysis was run properly.
The systems and methods described herein may find application in a variety of fields. In some cases, the systems and methods may be used to conduct quality control to determine, for example, a correct sequence of events taking place in the microfluidic system. If an incorrect sequence of events is determined, the feedback control may, for example, cancel the test being performed in the microfluidic system and/or alert the user of the abnormality. Additionally and/or alternatively, the systems and methods described herein may be used to modulate fluid flow such as mixing, introduction or removal of fluids into certain channels or reservoirs in the microfluidic system, actuation of one or more components such as a valve, pump, vacuum, or heater, and other processes. These and other processes may be applied to a variety of microfluidic systems such as, for example, microfluidic point-of-care diagnostic platforms, microfluidic laboratory chemical analysis systems, high-throughput detection systems, fluidic control systems in cell cultures or bio-reactors, among others. The articles, systems, and methods described
2300751.1 herein may be particularly useful, in some cases, where an inexpensive, robust, disposable microfluidic device is desired.
Furthermore, the feedback control described herein may be used to perform any suitable process in a microfluidic system, such as a chemical and/or biological reaction. As a specific example, the feedback control may be used to control reagent transport in antibody assays that employ unstable reaction precursors, such as the silver solution assay described in the Examples section. Other advantages are described in more detail below.
A series of exemplary systems and methods are now described.
FIG. 1 shows a block diagram 10 of a microfluidic system and various components that may provide feedback control according to one set of embodiments. The microfluidic system may include, for example, a device or cassette 20 operatively associated with one or more components such as a fluid flow source 40 such as a pump (e.g., for introducing one or more fluids into the device and/or for controlling the rates of fluid flow), optionally a fluid flow source 40 such as a pump or vacuum that may be configured to apply either of both of a positive pressure or vacuum (e.g., for
moving/removing one or more fluids within/from the cassette and/or for controlling the rates of fluid flow), a valving system 28 (e.g., for actuating one or more valves), a detection system 34 (e.g., for detecting one or more fluids and/or processes), and/or a temperature regulating system 41 (e.g., to heat and/or cool one or more regions of the device). The components may be external or internal to the microfluidic device, and may optionally include one or more processors for controlling the component or system of components. In certain embodiments, one or more such components and/or processors are associated with a sample analyzer 47 configured to process and/or analyze a sample contained in the microfluidic system.
In general, as used herein, a component that is "operatively associated with" one or more other components indicates that such components are directly connected to each other, in direct physical contact with each other without being connected or attached to each other, or are not directly connected to each other or in contact with each other, but are mechanically, electrically (including via electromagnetic signals transmitted through space), or fluidically interconnected (e.g., via channels such as tubing) so as to cause or enable the components so associated to perform their intended functionality.
2300751.1 The components shown illustratively in FIG. 1, as well as other optional components, may be operatively associated with a control system 50. In some embodiments, the control system may be used to control fluids and/or conduct quality control by the use of feedback from one or more events taking place in the microfluidic system. For instance, the control system may be configured to receive input signals from the one or more components, to calculate and/or control various parameters, to compare one or more signals or a pattern of signals with signals or values pre-programmed into the control system, and/or to send signals to one or more components to modulate fluid flow and/or control operation of the microfluidic system. Specific examples of feedback control are provided below.
The control system may also be optionally associated with other components such as a user interface 54, an identification system 56, an external communication unit 58 (e.g., a USB), and/or other components, as described in more detail below.
Microfluidic device (e.g., cassette) 20 may have any suitable configuration of channels and/or components for performing a desired analysis. In one set of
embodiments, microfluidic device 20 contains stored reagents that can be used for performing a chemical and/or biological reaction (e.g., an immunoassay). The microfluidic device may include, for example, an optional reagent inlet 62 in fluid communication with an optional reagent storage area 64. The storage area may include, for example, one or more channels and/or reservoirs that may, in some embodiments, be partially or completely filled with fluids (e.g., liquids and gases, including immiscible reagents such as reagent solutions and wash solutions, optionally separated by immiscible fluids, as described in more detail below). The device may also include an optional sample or reagent loading area 66, such as a fluidic connector that can be used to connect reagent storage area 64 to an optional measurement zone 68 (e.g., a reaction area). The measurement zone, which may include one or more zones (e.g., detection regions) for detecting a component in a sample, may be in fluid communication with an optional waste area 70 and coupled to outlet 72. In one set of embodiments, fluid may flow in the direction of the arrows shown in the figure. Further description and examples of such and other components are provided in more detail below.
In some embodiments, sections 71 and 77 of the device are not in fluid communication with one another prior to introduction of a sample into the device. In some cases, sections 71 and 77 are not in fluid communication with one another prior to
2300751.1 first use of the device, wherein at first use, the sections are brought into fluid communication with one another. In other embodiments, however, sections 71 and 77 are in fluid communication with one another prior to first use and/or prior to introduction of a sample into the device. Other configurations of devices are also possible.
As shown in the exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 1 , one or more fluid flow sources 40 such as a pump and/or a vacuum or other pressure-control system, valving system 28, detection system 34, temperature regulating system 41, and/or other components may be operatively associated with one or more of reagent inlet 62, reagent storage area 64, sample or reagent loading area 66, measurement zone 68, waste area 70, outlet 72, and/or other regions of microfluidic device 20. Detection of processes or events in one or more regions of the microfluidic device can produce a signal or pattern of signals that can be transmitted to control system 50. Based (at least in part) on the signal(s) received by the control system, this feedback can be used to manipulate fluids within and/or between each of these regions of the microfluidic device, such as by controlling one or more of a pump, vacuum, valving system, detection system, temperature regulating system, and/or other components. In some cases, the feedback can determine abnormalities that have occurred in the microfluidic system, and the control system may send a signal to one or more components to cause all or portions of the system to shut down. Consequently, the quality of the processes being performed in the microfluidic system can be controlled using the systems and methods described herein.
In some embodiments, feedback control involves the detection of one or more events or processes occurring in a microfluidic system. A variety of detection methods can be used, as described in more detail below. Detection may involve, for example, determination of at least one characteristic of a fluid, a component within a fluid, interaction between components within regions of the microfluidic device, or a condition within a region of the microfluidic device (e.g., temperature, pressure, humidity). For instance, detection may involve detecting an opacity of one or more fluids, a
concentration of one or more components in a fluid, a volume of one or more fluids, a flow rate of one or more fluids, a position of detecting a first fluid in time relative to a second position in time, and an average time period between the detection of a first fluid and a second fluid. Detection of the one more characteristics, conditions, or events may, in some embodiments, result in the generation of one or more signals, which can be
2300751.1 optionally further processed and transmitted to the control system. As described in more detail herein, the one or more signals may be compared with one or more signals, values or thresholds pre-programmed into the control system, and may be used to provide feedback to the microfluidic system.
A variety of signals or patterns of signals can be generated and/or determined
(e.g., measured) using the systems and methods described herein. In one set of embodiments, a signal includes an intensity component. Intensity may indicate or be used to indicate, for example, one or more of: the concentration of a component in a fluid, an indication of the type of fluid being detected (e.g., a sample type such as blood versus urine, or a physical characteristic of the fluid such as a liquid versus a gas), the amount of a component in a fluid, and the volume of a fluid. In some cases, intensity is determined by an opacity of a fluid or a component. In other embodiments, intensity is determined by the use of a marker or label such as a fluorescent marker or label.
In some embodiments, a frequency of signals may be generated and/or determined. For example, a series of signals each having an intensity (e.g., above or below a threshold intensity) may be measured by a detector. This number may be compared with a number of signals or values (having the intensity above or below the threshold intensity) pre-programmed into a control system or other unit. Based at least in part on this comparison, the control system may initiate, halt, or change a condition such as the modulation of fluid flow in the microfluidic system.
In some embodiments, a duration of a signal is generated and/or determined. The duration of a signal may indicate or be used to indicate, for example, one or more of: the volume of a fluid, the flow rate of a fluid, a characteristic of a component within a fluid (e.g., how long a component has a certain activity, such as chemiluminescence, fluorescence, and the like), and how long a particular fluid has been positioned in a specific region of the microfluidic device.
In some embodiments, a position of a signal in time relative to a second position in time or relative to another process or event (e.g., that has occurred in the microfluidic system) is generated and/or determined. For example, a detector may detect when a certain fluid passes across the detector (e.g., a first position in time), and the timing of this signal may be related to a second position in time (e.g., when detection was initiated; a certain amount of time after a process has occurred, etc.). In another example, a detector may detect when a certain fluid passes across the detector after (or before) a
2300751.1 component of the microfluidic system (e.g., a valve) has been actuated. In one embodiment, the opening of a valve may indicate that the mixing of reagents is about to occur, and thus the position of the signal in time may give some indication of when a certain fluid passes across the detector after (or before) the mixing of the reagents. If the position of the signal of the fluid occurs within a certain time range after (or before) the mixing of reagents, for example, this may indicate that the analysis is running properly. In another example, a detector may detect when a second fluid passes across the detector after a first fluid has passed across the detector. In other embodiments, a position of a signal in time is determined relative to a certain event or process that is taking or has taken place in the microfluidic system (e.g., the start of the analysis, the initiation of fluid flow, the initiation of detection in the microfluidic system, upon a user inserting the microfluidic device into an analyzer, etc.).
In another set of embodiments, an average time between signals or events is generated and/or determined. For instance, the average time period between two signals may be measured, where each of the signals may independently correspond to one or more characteristics or conditions described herein. In other embodiments, the average time between the first and the last of a series of similar signals is determined (e.g., the average time between a series of wash fluids passing across a detector).
In certain embodiments, a pattern of signals is generated and/or determined. The pattern of signals may include, for example, at least two of (or, in other embodiments, at least three of, or at least four of) an intensity of a signal, a frequency of signals, a duration of a signal, a position of a signal in time relative to a second position in time or relative to another process or event occurring (or has occurred) in the microfluidic system, and an average time period between two or more signals or events. In other embodiments, the pattern of signals comprises at least two of (or, in other embodiments, at least three of, or at least four of) an intensity of a first signal, a duration of the first signal, a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time; an intensity of a second signal, a duration of the second signal, a position of the second signal in time relative to a second position in time, and an average time period between the first and second signals. The pattern of signals may indicate, in some embodiments, whether a particular event or process is taking place properly within the microfluidic system. In other embodiments, the pattern of signals indicates whether a particular
2300751.1 process or event has occurred in the microfluidic system. In yet other embodiments, a pattern of signals can indicate a particular sequence of events.
A variety of signals or patterns of signals, such as those described above and herein, can be generated and/or determined and can be used alone or in combination to provide feedback for controlling one more or more processes, such as modulation of fluid flow in a microfluidic system. That is, the control system or any other suitable unit may determine, in some embodiments, whether to modulate fluid flow in the
microfluidic system based at least in part on the pattern of signals. For example, determination of whether to modulate fluid flow based at least in part on a pattern of signals that includes an intensity of a first signal and a position in time of the first signal relative to a second position in time may involve the use of both of these pieces of information to make a decision on whether or not to modulate fluid flow. For instance, these signals may be compared to one or more reference signals (e.g., a threshold intensity or intensity range, and a threshold position in time or range of positions in time, relative to a second position in time) that may be pre-programmed or pre-set into the control system. If each of the measured signals falls within the respective threshold values or ranges, a decision on whether to modulate fluid flow can be made. Only one of the parameters to be considered (e.g., only an intensity of the first signal or only a position in time of the first signal) that meets a threshold value or range may not be sufficient information to make a decision on whether or not to modulate fluid flow, because it may not give enough information about the fluid(s) or component(s) that gave rise to the signal(s) for the purposes described herein. For example, in some cases the fluid or component detected may not be sufficiently identified for the purposes described herein unless a pattern of signals is taken into consideration.
In certain embodiments, one or more measured signals is processed or manipulated (e.g., before or after transmission, and/or before being compared to a reference signal or value). It should be appreciated, therefore, that when a signal is transmitted (e.g., to a control system), compared (e.g., with a reference signal or value), or otherwise used in a feedback process, that the raw signal may be used or a processed/manipulated signal based (at least in part) on the raw signal may be used. For example, in some cases, one or more derivative signals of a measured signal can be calculated (e.g., using a differentiator, or any other suitable method) and used to provide feedback. In other cases, signals are normalized (e.g., subtracting a measured signal
2300751.1 from a background signal). In one set of embodiments, a signal comprises a slope or average slope, e.g., an average slope of intensity as a function of time.
In some cases, the measured signal may be converted to a digital signal with the use of an analog to digital converter so that all further signal processing may be performed by a digital computer or digital signal processor. Although in one
embodiment, all signal processing is performed digitally, the present invention is not so limited, as analog processing techniques may alternatively be used. For instance, a digital to analog converter may be used to produce an output signal. Signals may be processed in a time domain (one-dimensional signals), spatial domain (multidimensional signals), frequency domain, autocorrelation domain, or any other suitable domain. In some cases, signals are filtered, e.g., using a linear filter (a linear transformation of a measured signal), a non-linear filter, a causal filter, a non-causal filter, a time-invariant filter, a time- variant filter, or other suitable filters. It should be understood that the signals, patterns, and their use in feedback described herein are exemplary and that the invention is not limited in this respect.
Once a signal or pattern of signals has been determined, the signal(s) may be optionally transmitted to a control system. In some cases, the control system compares the signal or pattern of signals to a second set of signal(s). The second signal or pattern of signals may be, for example, signal(s) determined previously in the microfluidic system, or reference signal(s) or value(s) which may have been pre-programmed into the control system or other unit of the microfluidic system. In some cases, a reference signal or pattern of signals includes one or more threshold values or a range of threshold values. The control system may compare a first signal or pattern of signals with a second signal or pattern of signals (e.g., reference signals), and determine whether to initiate, cease, or modulate one or more events or series of events in the microfluidic system. That is, the measured signal or pattern of signals can be used by the control system to generate a drive signal and provide feedback control to the microfluidic system. For example, the control system may determine whether to modulate fluid flow (e.g., flow rate, mixing, the ceasing of flow of one or more fluids) in one or more regions of the microfluidic system. Other conditions such a modulation of temperature, pressure, humidity, or other conditions can also be controlled. This modulation may be performed, in certain embodiments, by the control system sending one or more drive signals to an appropriate component of the microfluidic system (e.g., a valve, pump, vacuum, heater, or other
2300751.1 component) to actuate that or another component. Any suitable valve drive electronics circuit may be used to receive a drive signal and convert the drive signal to a voltage, current, or other signal capable of actuating the component. In certain embodiments, the control system can determine whether or not to cease operation of one or more components of the microfluidic system. In some cases, the control system may determine whether or not to stop an analysis or a portion of an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system.
In some embodiments, a method of conducting feedback control may involve initiating detection of fluids at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system. A first fluid and a second fluid may be detected at the first measurement zone and a first signal corresponding to the first fluid and a second signal corresponding to the second fluid may be formed. A first pattern of signals may be transmitted to a control system, the first pattern of signals comprising at least two of an intensity of the first signal, a duration of the first signal, a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time, and an average time period between the first and second signals. A decision about whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system may be determined based at least in part on the first pattern of signals.
It should be understood that while much of the description herein describes the use of signals or patterns of signals, the invention is not so limited and that aspects of feedback control or other processes involving determination of characteristics, conditions or events involving fluids or components may not require the generation, determination (e.g., measurement) or analysis of signals or patterns of signals in some embodiments.
In some embodiments, a method of conducting feedback involves detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system, wherein the detection step comprises detecting at least two of (or at least three of) an opacity of the first fluid, a volume of the first fluid, a flow rate of the first fluid, a position of the detection of the first fluid in time relative to a second position in time, and an average time period between the detection of the first and second fluids. A decision about whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system may be determined based at least in part on the detection step.
In some embodiments, feedback control can be used to modulate the same condition, event, or type of condition or event that was first detected. For instance, the concentration of a component in a fluid can be determined, and a signal can be generated
2300751.1 and transmitted to a control system, which determines whether or not the concentration of the same component should be increased or decreased in the region of the microfluidic device. In another example, the flow rate of a fluid in a channel is measured, and based at least in part on the signal generated from the measurement, the source of fluid flow (e.g., a vacuum or pump) or a valve is used to modulate the flow rate in that same channel. In such and other embodiments, the signal generated may be compared to a pre-determined signal or values indicating a desired value or range of conditions (e.g., concentration, flow rate). The feedback control may involve a feedback loop (e.g., a positive or negative feedback loop) in some cases. In other cases, feedback control does not involve a feedback loop.
In other embodiments, however, (including many of the examples described herein) feedback control is based at least in part on the determination of one or more first conditions or events taking place in the microfluidic system, and signals from the one or more conditions or events is used to control a second, different set of conditions or events taking place (or events that will take place) in the microfluidic system. In certain embodiments, the second, different set of conditions or events do not substantially affect the first set of conditions or events (e.g., in contrast to the examples of above involving the modulation of concentration of a component or the flow rate in a channel). In some cases, detection takes place at a measurement zone, and feedback from the measurement zone is used to modulate fluid flow at a different region of the microfluidic system. For example, detection of a certain fluid passing across a detection system may trigger control of whether or not a particular valve is actuated to allow flow of one or more different fluids in a different region of the microfluidic system. In one particular embodiment, detection of a first fluid at (e.g., passing across) a reaction area may trigger the mixing of second and third fluids at a mixing region of the microfluidic system. The second and third fluids may be initially positioned at a different region (e.g., a storage region) of the microfluidic system than from where detection and production of the signal used to provide feedback takes place. In another example, the measurement of optical density of a sample flowing across a measurement zone (e.g., a first condition) gives an indication of whether the sample was introduced at the right time and/or the presence of the correct type or volume of sample. The one or more signals from this measurement can be compared to one or more pre-set values, and based (at least in part) on this feedback and comparison, a control system may cease fluid flow in the
2300751.1 microfluidic system (e.g., a second, different condition) if the measured signals falls out of range with the pre-set values. In some such and other embodiments, the first condition or event has already passed after the detection step, such that feedback control does not substantially modulate that same condition, event, or type of condition or event that produced the signal used for feedback.
In some embodiments, one or more feedback control methods such as proportional control, integral control, proportional-integral control, derivative control, proportional-derivative control, integral-derivative control, and proportional-integral- derivative control can be used by a control system to modulate fluid flow. The feedback control may involve a feedback loop in some embodiments. In some cases involving one or more of the aforementioned feedback control methods, a drive signal (which may be used to modulate fluid flow, e.g., by actuating a component of the microfluidic system) may be generated based at least in part on a signal that is the difference between a preprogrammed threshold signal or value (which may be indicative of a future action to be performed) and a feedback signal that is measured by a detector.
Detection of a condition or an event taking place in a microfluidic system may have a variety of forms. In some cases, detection occurs continuously. In other embodiments, detection occurs periodically; and yet other embodiments, detection occurs sporadically. In some cases, detection occurs upon a specific event or condition taking place.
As described herein, detection can take place at any suitable position with respect to a microfluidic device. In some cases, one or more detectors is stationery with respect to a microfluidic device during use and/or during detection. For example, a stationery detector may be positioned adjacent a certain region of the microfluidic device, such as a detection region or measurement zone, where one or more events (e.g., a chemical or biological reaction) takes place. The detector may detect, for example, the passing of fluids across the measurement zone. Additionally or alternatively, the detector may detect the binding or association of other components at that region (e.g., the binding of a component to surface of the measurement zone). In some embodiments, a stationery detector may monitor multiple measurement zones simultaneously. For example, a detector such as a camera may be used to image an entire microfluidic device, or large portion of the device, and only certain areas of the device scrutinized. Components such
2300751.1 as optical fibers may be used to transmit light from multiple measurement zones to a single detector.
In other embodiments, a detector is removably positioned with respect to the microfluidic device during use and/or during detection. For example, a detector may be physically moved across different regions of the microfluidic device to detect the movement of fluids across the device. For example, a detector may track the movement of certain fluids and/or components in channels of the microfluidic device.
Alternatively, the microfluidic device can moved relative to a stationary detector. Other configurations and uses of detectors are also possible.
Examples of signals or patterns of signals that can be used in feedback control are shown in the exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is a plot showing the detection of various fluids as they flow in a region of a device (e.g., a channel) and pass across a detector. Plot 100 shows the measurement of optical density in arbitrary units (y-axis) as a function of time (x-axis). In certain embodiments, the transmission and/or absorbance of a fluid, for example, can be detected as it passes across a region of a microfluidic system. An optical density of zero may indicate maximum light transmission (e.g., low absorbance) and a higher optical density may indicate low transmission (e.g., higher absorbance). As different fluids flowing across the detector may have different susceptibilities to transmission or absorbance of light, the detection of specific fluids, including their volumes, flow rates, and fluid types, can be determined.
For instance, as shown illustratively in FIG. 2, a first fluid producing signal 110 may pass across the detector at around time = 0.1 seconds until approximately 700 seconds. (Time = 0 seconds may indicate, for example, the initiation of detection.) First fluid 110 has a particular intensity 112 (e.g., an optical density of about 0.23). If a particular type of fluid having a specific intensity or range of intensities is expected to flow across the detector at a particular point in time (e.g., at a time of approximately 400 seconds after initiation of detection) or between a certain period of time (e.g., sometime between 0 and 800 seconds), the confirmation that this process has occurred can be detected. For example, first fluid producing 110 may, in some embodiments, be a particular type of sample that is to be introduced into the microfluidic device for performing a particular analysis. If the sample type is associated with a particular intensity (e.g., whole blood will give an optical density of approximately 0.23), the type
2300751.1 of sample can be verified by determining whether or not that sample has an intensity within an allowed range.
Furthermore, the proper introduction of the sample into the device at a correct time (e.g., at the beginning of the analysis) can be verified by determining where the sample signal occurs as a function of time (along the x-axis). For instance, the time when the sample reaches the measurement zone (observed in an OD having a certain range or intensity) can be monitored. If the sample takes too long to enter the measurement zone, this could indicate, for example, a leak or a clog in the system. If it takes too long for the sample to reach the first measurement zone or there is too much time between the sample or portions of the sample reaching multiple measurement zones (which may be positioned in parallel or in series), the test may be cancelled.
Additionally, the volume of first fluid which produces signal 110 can be determined and verified by measuring time period 114 of the signal. If the particular process to be performed in the microfluidic device requires a sample having a particular volume, this can be verified. For example, a sample having a particular volume (e.g., 10 μυ> may be expected, corresponding to an expected range of flow time (e.g., signal having a certain duration) at a certain intensity (e.g., sample OD). The test may ensure that the user correctly loaded the sample into the fluidic connector or other suitable sample introduction device. If the duration of the sample signal is too short (which may indicate not enough sample was introduced) or too long (which may indicate too much sample was introduced) the test may be cancelled and/or the results disregarded.
If, for example, the intensity, time period, or positioning of signal 110 that results from the first fluid is incorrect, the control system may trigger a secondary process that may, for example, modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system. For example, in one set of embodiments, the control system may determine that since an incorrect sample type or volume was introduce into the device, or introduced into the device at an incorrect time, the analysis to be performed by the microfluidic device should be canceled. In other embodiments, cancelation may occur due to a problem with the device (e.g., a clog in the channels that does not allow fluid to flow at a particular flow rate), or a problem with an analyzer used to analyze the device (e.g., the malfunction of one or more components such as a valve, pump, or vacuum).
The analysis can be canceled, for example, by modulating fluid flow in the microfluidic system (e.g., sending a signal to a pump or a vacuum to stop the flow of
2300751.1 fhiids), ceasing power to certain components of the system, by ejecting the microfluidic device/cassette from the analyzing system (e.g., automatically or informing a user to do so), or by other processes.
In other embodiments, an abnormality occurring in the system triggers a secondary event to occur, but does not cancel the analysis. In some cases, a user may be alerted that an abnormality has occurred in the system. The user may be informed that results of the test should not be relied upon, that the analysis needs to be performed again, that the analysis may take longer to perform, or that the user should take some action. In some cases, the user can be notified and then asked to verify whether or not one or more processes of the microfluidic system, or the analysis being performed, should be continued. Other methods of quality control are also possible.
In one set of embodiments, a method of conducting quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of a microfluidic system includes detecting a first fluid at (e.g., passing across) a first measurement zone of the microfluidic system and forming a first signal corresponding to the first fluid, and transmitting the first signal to a control system. The first signal may be compared to a reference signal, thereby determining the presence of abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system. The method may include determining whether to cease operation of the microfluidic system based at least in part on results of the comparing step. In some cases, the control system may determine whether or not to stop an analysis or a portion of an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system.
As show illustratively in FIG. 2, the type of fluid passing across a detector can be determined at least in part by the intensity of the signal generated by the fluid. For example, whereas signal 110 from a first fluid has a high intensity (e.g., a low light transmission), a second series of fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124 have a relatively low intensity (e.g., a high light transmission). The plot also indicates the relative separation between the first fluid producing signal 110 and the second fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124. For instance, the difference between time period 125 and time period 114 can give an indication of how quickly the second set of fluids is flowed across the detector after the first fluid has finished passing across the detector. In some embodiments, this difference in time can be compared with one or more reference signals or values (e.g., a predetermined amount of separation time or time range that is supposed to occur between the first fluid and the second fluids). A difference in time
2300751.1 that does not match the reference signal or value, or fall within an allowable range, can indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the microfluidic system. For example, if the time different between time periods 125 and 114 is too long, this may indicate that fluid flow has been obstructed (e.g., due to a clog in a channel by an air bubble or by other means), but later unobstructed in the microfluidic device. In some embodiments, this could influence the test being performed, and as such, the control system may determine whether or not one or more processes should be ceased or modified in the microfluidic system.
As shown illustratively in FIG. 2, second fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124 are separated by peaks 126, 128 and 130. These peaks represent fluids that are flowed between the second fluids. As described in more detail herein, in some cases these separation fluids may be fluids that are immiscible with the fluids they are separating. For example, in one set of embodiments, second fluids producing signals 120, 122 and 124 are wash solutions that pass across the measurement zone. These wash fluids may be separated by immiscible (separation) fluids (e.g., plugs of air) that produce signals 126, 128 and 130. The wash solutions may have a relatively high transmission, and therefore a relatively low optical density, whereas the plugs of air may have a relatively lower light transmission (e.g., a relatively higher optical density) due to scattering of light as these fluids pass across the detector. Because of the different susceptibility of these fluids to the transmission of light, the different fluids (including the fluid type, phase, volume, flow rate) can be distinguished. In addition, the sequence of second fluids passing across the detector may have a time period 134, which may optionally be compared to an optimal time period or time period range and may optionally be used in feedback control.
In certain embodiments, the number of washes (peaks and troughs) is counted and a control system cancels the analysis if the expected number is not observed. Fewer washes could mean the reagents had evaporated during storage of the device (indicating a leak) or a problem in the connection of the fluidic connector. Too few washes could also indicate that the correct number had not been loaded in the device during device manufacture. Too many washes would indicate that the wash plugs had broken up during storage.
FIG. 2 also shows a third fluid producing signal 135 passing across the measurement zone after the flowing of the second fluids. Since the third fluid has a
2300751.1 similar optical density as those of the second set of fluids, the third fluid may be identified or distinguished from other fluids at least in part by its time period 136, which may give an indication of the fluid's volume. The position of time period 136 along the time line (or relative to one or more other signals present) can also give an indication of the fluid being flowed across the measurement zone. For example, the analysis may be designed such that a fluid giving a certain optical density (e.g., -0.01) and duration (e.g., ~ 200 seconds at a particular flow rate to be used or pressure to be applied) will occur between 900 seconds and 1200 seconds after the initiation of the analysis. These parameters can be pre-programmed into the control system, and compared with signal 135 measured by the detector.
The third fluid producing signal 135 can be any suitable fluid, and in some cases is reagent to be used in a chemical and/or biological reaction to be performed in the microfluidic device. For example, as described in more detail below, the third fluid may be a detection antibody that may bind with one or more components of the sample. In other embodiments, however, a detection antibody is bound with a component of the sample before the sample flows across the detector. Other configurations of binding a detection antibody are also possible, and in some embodiments, no detection antibody is used at all.
After the third fluid is flowed across the measurement zone, a series of fourth fluids producing signals 140, 142, 144, 146, 148 and 150 may flow across the measurement zone. Each of the fourth fluids may be separated by an immiscible fluid (e.g., air plugs) producing signals 154. In certain embodiments, the frequency of signals having a certain threshold (e.g., air plugs producing signals 154 having a threshold above an optical density of 0.05 and/or a series of fourth fluids having an optical density below 0.01) can be used to trigger one or more events in the microfluidic system.
In some cases, the intensity and frequency of a series of fluids can be combined with a total time period between the first and last of such fluids (e.g., time period 158 encompassing the series of fourth fluids). For example, feedback or the triggering of an event may be based at least in part on the frequency of signals (e.g., peaks) observed in combination with one or more time periods between adjacent signals, and/or in combination with the intensity of the signals, and/or in combination with the time period between the first and last signal of that type or intensity. Optionally, one or more of the signals can be used in combination with the average position of the signals relative to the
2300751.1 time scale of events along the time line (e.g., the average time 158 between signals 140 and 150 relative to one or more other signals or reference points (e.g., time = zero)).
In some embodiments, the event that is triggered by a pattern of signals is the modulation of fluid flow within the microfluidic system. For example, one or more of a pump, vacuum, valving system, or other component can be actuated based at least in part on the presence of absence of a particular pattern of signals. As one example, a pattern of signals may trigger the actuation of a valve that allows one or more fluids to flow into a particular channel of the microfluidic device. For instance, actuation of the valve may allow two fluids that are kept separate during storage of the fluids in the device to mix in a common channel. In one particular embodiment, a mixed fluid includes an
amplification reagent that allows amplification of a signal in a measurement zone of the device. Specific examples are provided in more detail below.
As described herein, a detector may not only detect the passing of fluids across a region of a microfluidic device, but may also detect the presence or absence of an event or condition occurring in a region of the microfluidic device. For example, in some cases a binding event is detected. In other embodiments, the accumulation and/or deposition of a component in a particular region of the microfluidic device is detected. And yet other embodiments, the amplification of a signal is detected. Such processes can occur at any suitable position within a region of a device. For instance, the event or condition may occur within a fluid positioned in the region of the device, on a surface of a channel or chamber of the device, on or in a component positioned within the region of the device (e.g., on a surface of a bead, in a gel, on a membrane).
In some cases, the progression of the event or condition can be determined, and, optionally, compared to one or more reference signals or values (which may be pre- programmed into the control system). For instance, as shown illustratively in FIG. 2, a peak 160 may form due to the build up of a signal (e.g., an opaque layer) in a measurement zone. This slope of the peak may be measured and compared with one or more control values to determine whether or not a correct process is occurring or has occurred in the measurement zone. For example, if the slope of peak 160 is within a particular range of acceptable values, this may indicate that there were no abnormalities in the storage of reagents that were used in part to produce the signal.
In one set of embodiments, peak 160 indicates an amplification reagent entering the measurement zone. The analysis may be designed and configured such that the
2300751.1 amplification reagent enters the measurement zone within a certain time period after a certain event takes place (e.g., upon actuation of a valve). In some cases, the amplification reagent should have a certain optical density associated with it (e.g., a low optical density if the reagent is a clear liquid). If the reagent is late in arriving at the measurement zone and/or or the initial optical density is too high, the test can be cancelled. If the reagent has a high optical density (e.g., it is dark or opaque), this could indicate that the reagent has been spoiled (e.g., during storage of the reagent in the device).
In some embodiments, a device may include multiple measurement zones (e.g., in parallel or in series). One measurement zone may be used as a negative control. For instance, minimal binding or deposition of a substance (e.g., an opaque layer), and therefore a low optical density in some embodiments, may be expected in the negative control measurement zone. If a detector measures an elevated optical density in the negative control measurement zone, this may indicate, for example, non-specific binding. In some cases, the signal from this measurement zone can be considered
"background" and subtracted from signals in the other measurement zones to account for non-specific binding which may occur throughout the system. If the background is too high, the test may be cancelled. This may, for example, indicate a problem with the amplification reagents or other reagents used in the analysis.
In some embodiments, a device may include a measurement zone used as a positive control. The positive control may, in some embodiments, include a known amount of analyte bound to the measurement zone (e.g., to the channel walls), and the level of the optical density signals at a certain point in time, the slope of these signals, or the change in slope of these signals in the zone may fall within an expected range. These ranges can be determined during calibration of a specified lot of devices. In some cases, as described in more detail herein, this information may be included in the lot-specific information transferred to an analyzer by use of a lot-specific tag, such as a bar-code, memory stick, or radio-frequency identification (RFID) tag. If the reference levels for these measurement zones fall out of range, the test may be cancelled. Similar to background, these signals can also be used to adjust the test signal (e.g., increasing the test signal slightly if these signals are elevated, decreasing the test signal if these signals are low).
2300751.1 The presence of obstructions such as bubbles or other components during one or more events (e.g., amplification, mixing) and/or at one or more unexpected positions in time may indicate problems in the analysis, such as a leak in a valve. These bubbles or other components can be detected as peaks having a certain intensity in the optical density pattern (which may be similar to the air plug peaks used during washing). If these are observed in unexpected places, the test can be cancelled.
It should be understood that while optical density (e.g., transmission or absorbance) was determined in FTG. 2, in other embodiments other types of signals can be measured using a suitable detector. The signals may be produced absent a label (such as in measuring optical density), or produced using a label. A variety of different labels can be used, such as fluorescent markers, dyes, quantum dots, magnetic particles, and other labels known in the art.
As shown illustratively in FIG. 2, in some embodiments an analysis performed in a device can be recorded to produce essentially a "fingerprint" of the analysis. All or potions of the fingerprint may be used to provide feedback to the microfluidic system. In some cases, the fingerprint includes signals from the passing of substantially all fluids used in an analysis across a region of the device. Since different fluids used in the analysis may have different volumes, flow rates, compositions, and other characteristics, these properties can be reflected in the fingerprint. As such, the fingerprint can be used to identify, for example, the fluids used in the analysis, the timing of the fluids (e.g., when particular fluids were introduced into certain regions of the device), interaction of the fluids (e.g., mixing). In some embodiments, the fingerprint can be used to identify the type of analysis performed in the device and/or the test format (e.g., a sandwich assay versus a competitive assay) of the analysis.
In one set of embodiments, the fingerprint as a whole (e.g., the general shape, duration, and timing of all signals) is used to conduct quality control at the end of the analysis. For instance, the fingerprint may be compared with a control fingerprint to determine whether the analysis was run properly after all fluids have been flowed. The control system may, in some cases, notify the user as to whether the analysis was run properly (e.g., via a user interface).
In other embodiments, a detector may be positioned within certain regions of a microfluidic system and may only determine the presence or passing of certain, but not all, fluids across the detector. For example, a detector may be positioned at a mixing
2300751.1 region to determine proper mixing of fluids. If the fluids are mixed properly (e.g., a mixed fluid having a certain property such as a certain concentration or volume is produced) or mixed at a proper point in time relative to one or more other events occurring in the analysis, feedback control may allow the mixed fluid to flow into another region of the device. If the mixed fluid does not have one or more desired or predetermined characteristics, feedback control may prevent the mixed fluid may flowing into the region and, in some embodiments, may initiate a second set of fluids to be mixed and transported to the region.
In certain embodiments, feedback control comprises the use of two or more detectors. A first detector may determine a first set of signals, and a second detector may determine a second set of signals. The first and second set of signals may be compared with one another, and/or each may be compared with a set of reference signals or values which may be pre-programmed into a control system. For example, a device may include a plurality of measurement zones, each measurement zone associated with a detector that measures signals in that region. In some cases, the system is designed and configured such that a first detector determines a fingerprint of the analysis that substantially matches the fingerprint of the analysis of a second detector. If the fingerprints do not match, however, this may indicate that an abnormality has occurred within the system. In some cases, the first and/or second detectors may detect the passing of all fluids used in the analysis across a region of the device, or only certain (but not all) fluids passing across a region of the device, as described above. In other embodiments, feedback control, or determination of a value in general, may involve the use of signals detected from multiple measurement zones. For example, flow rate may be determined by measuring how long it takes a bubble or a leading edge of a fluid to travel between two measurement zones.
Feedback control and other processes and methods described herein may be conducted using any suitable microfluidic system, such as those described in more detail below. In some cases, the microfluidic system includes a device or cassette that may be configured to be inserted in a microfluidic sample analyzer. FIGS. 3-6 illustrate various exemplary embodiments of the cassette 20 for use with an analyzer. As shown illustratively in these figures, the cassette 20 may be substantially card-shaped (i.e.
similar to a card key) having a substantially rigid plate-like structure.
2300751.1 The cassette 20 may be configured to include a fluidic connector 220, which as shown in exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 3, may snap into one end of the cassette 20. In certain embodiments, the fluidic connector can be used to introduce one or more fluids (e.g., a sample or a reagent) into the cassette.
In one set of embodiments, the fluidic connector is used to fluidly connect two
(or more) channels of the cassette during first use, which channels are not connected prior to first use. For example, the cassette may include two channels that are not in fluid communication prior to first use of the cassette. Non-connected channels may be advantageous in certain cases, such as for storing different reagents in each of the channels. For example, a first channel may be used to store dry reagents and a second channel may be used to store wet reagents. Having the channels be physically separated from one another can enhance long-term stability of the reagents stored in each of the channels, e.g., by keeping the reagent(s) stored in dry form protected from moisture that may be produced by reagent(s) stored in wet form. At first use, the channels may be connected via the fluidic connector to allow fluid communication between the channels of the cassette. For instance, the fluidic connected may puncture seals covering inlets and/or outlets of the cassette to allow insertion of the fluidic connector into the cassette.
As used herein, "prior to first use of the cassette" means a time or times before the cassette is first used by an intended user after commercial sale. First use may include any step(s) requiring manipulation of the device by a user. For example, first use may involve one or more steps such as puncturing a sealed inlet to introduce a reagent into the cassette, connecting two or more channels to cause fluid communication between the channels, preparation of the device (e.g., loading of reagents into the device) before analysis of a sample, loading of a sample onto the device, preparation of a sample in a region of the device, performing a reaction with a sample, detection of a sample, etc. First use, in this context, does not include manufacture or other preparatory or quality control steps taken by the manufacturer of the cassette. Those of ordinary skill in the art are well aware of the meaning of first use in this context, and will be able easily to determine whether a cassette of the invention has or has not experienced first use. In one set of embodiments, cassette of the invention are disposable after first use (e.g., after completion of an assay), and it is particularly evident when such devices are first used, because it is typically impractical to use the devices at all (e.g., for performing a second assay) after first use.
2300751.1 A cassette may be coupled to a fluidic connector using a variety of mechanisms. For example, the fluidic connector may include at least one non-fluidic feature complementary to a feature of the cassette so as to form a non-fluidic connection between the fluidic connector and the cassette upon attachment. The non-fluidic complementary feature may be, for example, a protruding feature of the fluidic connector and corresponding complementary cavities of the cassette, which can help the user align the fluidic connector with the cassette. In some cases, the feature creates a substantial resistance to movement of the fluidic connector relative to the cassette and/or alignment element upon the alignment element receiving the fluidic component (e.g., upon insertion of the fluidic component into the alignment element) and/or during intended use of the device. The fluidic connector and/or cassette may optionally include one or more features such as snap features (e.g., indentations), grooves, openings for inserting clips, zip-tie mechanisms, pressure-fittings, friction- fittings, threaded connectors such as screw fittings, snap fittings, adhesive fittings, magnetic connectors, or other suitable coupling mechanisms. Connection of the fluidic connector to the cassette may involve forming a liquid-tight and/or air-tight seal between the components. Attachment of a fluidic connector to a cassette may be reversible or irreversible.
As shown, the cassette 20 may be configured to include a fluidic connector 220. In particular, the cassette 20 may include a fluidic connector alignment element 202 which is configured to receive and mate with the connector 220. The alignment element may be constructed and arranged to engage with the fluidic connector and thereby position the connector in a predetermined, set configuration relative to the cassette. As shown in the illustrative embodiments of FIG. 3, the cassette may include an alignment element that extends approximately perpendicular to the cassette. In other embodiments, the alignment element may extend approximately parallel to the cassette.
In some embodiments, the configuration of the alignment element and the fluidic connector may be adapted to allow insertion of the fluidic connector into the alignment element by a sliding motion. For example, the fluidic connector may slide against one or more surfaces of the alignment element when the fluidic connector is inserted into the alignment element.
The fluidic connector may include a substantially U-shaped channel which may hold a fluid and/or reagent (e.g., a fluid sample) prior to be connected to the cassette. The channel may be housed between two shell components which form the connector.
2300751.1 In some embodiments, the fluidic connector may be used to collect a sample from the patient prior to the fluidic connector being connected to the cassette. For example, with a blood sample, the fluidic connector may be configured to puncture a patient' s finger to collect the sample in the channel. In other embodiments, fluid connector does not contain a sample (or reagent) prior to connection to the cassette, but simply allows fluid communication between two or more channels of the cassette upon connection. In one embodiment, the U-shaped channel is formed with a capillary tube. The fluidic connector can also include other channel configurations, and in some embodiments, may include more than one channels that may be fluidically connected or unconnected to one another.
As shown illustratively in the exploded assembly view of FIG. 4, the cassette 20 may include a cassette body 204 which includes at least one channel 206 configured to receive a sample or reagent. The cassette body 204 may also include latches 208 positioned on one end that interlock with the fluidic connector alignment element 202 for a snap fit.
The cassette 20 may also include top and bottom covers 210 and 212, which may, for example, be made of a transparent material. In some embodiments, a cover can be in the form of a biocompatible adhesive and can be made of a polymer (e.g., PE, COC, PVC) or an inorganic material for example. In some cases, one or more covers are in the form of an adhesive film (e.g., a tape). For some applications, the material and dimensions of a cover are chosen such that the cover is substantially impermeable to water vapor. In other embodiments, the cover can be non-adhesive, but may bond thermally to the microfluidic substrate by direct application of heat, laser energy, or ultrasonic energy. Any inlet(s) and/or outlet(s) of a channel of the cassette can be sealed (e.g., by placing an adhesive over the inlet(s) and/or outlet(s)) using one or more covers. In some cases, the cover substantially seals one or more stored reagents in the cassette.
As illustrated, the cassette body 204 may include one or more ports 214 coupled to the channel 206 in the cassette body 204. These ports 214 can be configured to align with the substantially U-shaped channel 222 in the fluidic connector 220 when the fluidic connector 220 is coupled to the cassette 20 to fluidly connect the channel 206 in the cassette body 204 with the channel 222 in the fluidic connector 220. As shown, a cover 216 may be provided over the ports 214 and the cover 216 may be configured to be pieced or otherwise opened (e.g., by the connector 220 or by other means) to fluidly
2300751.1 connect the two channels 206 and 222. Additionally, a cover 218 may be provided to cover port 219 (e.g., a vacuum port) in the cassette body 204. As set forth in further detail below, the port 219 may be configured to fluidly connect a fluid flow source 40 with the channel 206 to move a sample through the cassette. The cover 218 over the port 219 may be configured to be pierced or otherwise opened to fluidly connect the channel 206 with the fluid flow source 40.
The cassette body 204 may optionally include a liquid containment region such as a waste area, including an absorbent material 217 (e.g., a waste pad). In some embodiments, the liquid containment region includes regions that capture one or more liquids flowing in the cassette, while allowing gases or other fluids in the cassette to pass through the region. This may be achieved, in some embodiments, by positioning one or more absorbent materials in the liquid containment region for absorbing the liquids. This configuration may be useful for removing air bubbles from a stream of fluid and/or for separating hydrophobic liquids from hydrophilic liquids. In certain embodiments, the liquid containment region prevents liquids from passing through the region. In some such cases, the liquid containment region may act as a waste area by capturing substantially all of the liquid in the cassette, thereby preventing liquids from exiting the cassette (e.g., while allowing gases to escape from an outlet of the cassette). For example, the waste area may be used to store the sample and/or reagents in the cassette after they have passed through the channel 206 during the analysis of the sample. These and other arrangements may be useful when the cassette is used as a diagnostic tool, as the liquid containment region may prevent a user from being exposed to potentially- harmful fluids in the cassette.
FIG. 5 shows a cassette having a certain configuration of channels and including various components of a microfluidic system for manipulating fluids. FIG. 6 shows another example of a configuration of channels that may be part of a cassette. As shown illustratively in FIGS. 5 and 6, in some embodiments, a cassette may include a first channel 206 and a second channel 207 spaced apart from the first channel. In one embodiment, the channels 206, 207 range in largest cross-section dimension from approximately 50 micrometers to approximately 500 micrometers, although other channel sizes and configurations may be used, as described in more detail below.
The first channel 206 may include one or more measurement zones used to analyze the sample. For example, in one illustrative embodiment, the channel 206
2300751.1 includes four measurement zones 209 which are utilized during sample analysis (see FIG. 6).
In certain embodiments, one or more measurement zones are the form of meandering regions (e.g., regions involving meandering channels). A meandering region may, for example, be defined by an area of at least 0.25 mm2, at least 0.5 mm2, at least 0.75 mm2, or at least 1.0 mm2, wherein at least 25%, 50%, or 75% of the area of the meandering region comprises an optical detection pathway. A detector that allows measurement of a single signal through more than one adjacent segments of the meandering region may be positioned adjacent the meandering region.
As described herein, the first channel 206 and/or the second channel 207 may be used to store one or more reagents used to process and analyze the sample prior to first use of the cassette. In some embodiments, dry reagents are stored in one channel or section of a cassette and wet reagents are stored in a second channel or section of cassette. Alternatively, two separate sections or channels of a cassette may both contain dry reagents and/or wet reagents. Reagents can be stored and/or disposed, for example, as a liquid, a gas, a gel, a plurality of particles, or a film. The reagents may be positioned in any suitable portion of a cassette, including, but not limited to, in a channel, reservoir, on a surface, and in or on a membrane, which may optionally be part of a reagent storage area. A reagent may be associated with a cassette (or components of a cassette) in any suitable manner. For example, reagents may be crosslinked (e.g., covalently or ionically), absorbed, or adsorbed (physisorbed) onto a surface within the cassette. In one particular embodiment, all or a portion of a channel (such as a fluid path of a fluid connector or a channel of the cassette) is coated with an anti-coagulant (e.g., heparin). In some cases, a liquid is contained within a channel or reservoir of a cassette prior to first use and/or prior to introduction of a sample into the cassette.
In some embodiments, the stored reagents may include fluid plugs positioned in linear order so that during use, as fluids flow to a reaction site, they are delivered in a predetermined sequence. A cassette designed to perform an assay, for example, may include, in series, a rinse fluid, a labeled- antibody fluid, a rinse fluid, and a amplification fluid, all stored therein. While the fluids are stored, they may be kept separated by substantially immiscible separation fluids (e.g., a gas such as air) so that fluid reagents that would normally react with each other when in contact may be stored in a common channel.
2300751.1 Reagents can be stored in a cassette for various amounts of time. For example, a reagent may be stored for longer than 1 hour, longer than 6 hours, longer than 12 hours, longer than 1 day, longer than 1 week, longer than 1 month, longer than 3months, longer than 6 months, longer than 1 year, or longer than 2 years. Optionally, the cassette may be treated in a suitable manner in order to prolong storage. For instance, cassettes having stored reagents contained therein may be vacuum sealed, stored in a dark environment, and/or stored at low temperatures (e.g., below 0 degrees C). The length of storage depends on one or more factors such as the particular reagents used, the form of the stored reagents (e.g., wet or dry), the dimensions and materials used to form the substrate and cover layer(s), the method of adhering the substrate and cover layer(s), and how the cassette is treated or stored as a whole.
As illustrated in the exemplary embodiment shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, channels 206 and 207 may not be in fluid communication with each other until the fluidic connector 220 is coupled to the cassette 20. In other words, the two channels, in some embodiments, are not in fluid communication with one another prior to first use and/or prior to introduction of a sample into the cassette. In particular, as illustrated, the substantially U-shaped channel 222 of the connector 220 may fluidly connect the first and second channels 206, 207 such that the reagents in the second channel 207 can pass through the U-shaped channel 22 and selectively move into the measurement zones 209 in the first channel 206. In other embodiments, the two channels 206 and 207 are in fluid communication with one another prior to first use, and/or prior to introduction of a sample into the cassette, but the fluidic connector further connects the two channels (e.g., to form a closed-loop system) upon first use.
In some embodiments, a cassette described herein may include one more microfluidic channels, although such cassettes are not limited to microfluidic systems and may relate to other types of fluidic systems. "Microfluidic," as used herein, refers to a cassette, device, apparatus or system including at least one fluid channel having a maximum cross-sectional dimension of less than 1 mm, and a ratio of length to largest cross-sectional dimension of at least 3:1. A "microfluidic channel," as used herein, is a channel meeting these criteria.
The "cross-sectional dimension" (e.g., a diameter) of the channel is measured perpendicular to the direction of fluid flow. Most fluid channels in components of cassettes described herein have maximum cross-sectional dimensions less than 2 mm,
2300751.1 and in some cases, less than 1 mm. In one set of embodiments, all fluid channels of a cassette are microfluidic or have a largest cross sectional dimension of no more than 2 mm or 1 mm. In another set of embodiments, the maximum cross-sectional dimension of the channel(s) are less than 500 microns, less than 200 microns, less than 100 microns, less than 50 microns, or less than 25 microns. In some cases the dimensions of the channel may be chosen such that fluid is able to freely flow through the article or substrate. The dimensions of the channel may also be chosen, for example, to allow a certain volumetric or linear flowrate of fluid in the channel. Of course, the number of channels and the shape of the channels can be varied by any suitable method known to those of ordinary skill in the art. In some cases, more than one channel or capillary may be used.
A channel may include a feature on or in an article (e.g., a cassette) that at least partially directs the flow of a fluid. The channel can have any suitable cross-sectional shape (circular, oval, triangular, irregular, square or rectangular, or the like) and can be covered or uncovered. In embodiments where it is completely covered, at least one portion of the channel can have a cross-section that is completely enclosed, or the entire channel may be completely enclosed along its entire length with the exception of its inlet(s) and outlet(s). A channel may also have an aspect ratio (length to average cross sectional dimension) of at least 2:1, more typically at least 3:1, 5:1, or 10:1 or more.
Cassettes described herein may include channels or channel segments positioned on one or two sides of the cassette. In some cases, the channels are formed in a surface of the cassette. The channel segments may be connected by an intervening channel passing through the cassette. In some embodiments, the channel segments are used to store reagents in the device prior to first use by an end user. The specific geometry of the channel segments and the positions of the channel segments within the cassettes may allow fluid reagents to be stored for extended periods of time without mixing, even during routine handling of the cassettes such as during shipping of the cassettes, and when the cassettes are subjected to physical shock or vibration.
In certain embodiments, a cassette includes optical elements that are fabricated on one side of a cassette opposite a series of fluidic channels. An "optical element" is used to refer to a feature formed or positioned on or in an article or cassette that is provided for and used to change the direction (e.g., via refraction or reflection), focus,
polarization, and/or other property of incident electromagnetic radiation relative to the
2300751.1 light incident upon the article or cassette in the absence of the element. For example, an optical element may comprise a lens (e.g., concave or convex), mirror, grating, groove, or other feature formed or positioned in or on a cassette. A cassette itself absent a unique feature, however, would not constitute an optical element, even though one or more properties of incident light may change upon interaction with the cassette. The optical elements may guide incident light passing through the cassette such that most of the light is dispersed away from specific areas of the cassette, such as intervening portions between the fluidic channels. By decreasing the amount of light incident upon these intervening portions, the amount of noise in a detection signal can be decreased when using certain optical detection systems. In some embodiments, the optical elements comprise triangular grooves formed on or in a surface of the cassette. The draft angle of the triangular grooves may be chosen such that incident light normal to the surface of the cassette is redirected at an angle dependent upon the indices of refraction of the external medium (e.g., air) and the cassette material. In some embodiments, one or more optical elements are positioned between adjacent segments of a meandering region of a measurement zone.
A cassette can be fabricated of any material suitable for forming a channel. Non- limiting examples of materials include polymers (e.g., polyethylene, polystyrene, polymethylmethacrylate, polycarbonate, poly(dimethylsiloxane), PTFE, PET, and a cyclo-olefin copolymer), glass, quartz, and silicon. The material forming the cassette and any associated components (e.g., a cover) may be hard or flexible. Those of ordinary skill in the art can readily select suitable material(s) based upon e.g., its rigidity, its inertness to (e.g., freedom from degradation by) a fluid to be passed through it, its robustness at a temperature at which a particular device is to be used, its
transparency/opacity to light (e.g., in the ultraviolet and visible regions), and/or the method used to fabricate features in the material. For instance, for injection molded or other extruded articles, the material used may include a thermoplastic (e.g.,
polypropylene, polycarbonate, acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene, nylon 6), an elastomer (e.g., polyisoprene, isobutene-isoprene, nitrile, neoprene, ethylene-propylene, hypalon, silicone), a thermoset (e.g., epoxy, unsaturated polyesters, phenolics), or combinations thereof.
In some embodiments, the material and dimensions (e.g., thickness) of a cassette and/or cover are chosen such that it is substantially impermeable to water vapor. For
2300751.1 instance, a cassette designed to store one or more fluids therein prior to first use may include a cover comprising a material known to provide a high vapor barrier, such as metal foil, certain polymers, certain ceramics and combinations thereof. In other cases, the material is chosen based at least in part on the shape and/or configuration of the cassette. For instance, certain materials can be used to form planar devices whereas other materials are more suitable for forming devices that are curved or irregularly shaped.
In some instances, a cassette is comprised of a combination of two or more materials, such as the ones listed above. For instance, channels of the cassette may be formed in polystyrene or other polymers (e.g., by injection molding) and a biocompatible tape may be used to seal the channels. The biocompatible tape or flexible material may include a material known to improve vapor barrier properties (e.g., metal foil, polymers or other materials known to have high vapor barriers), and may optionally allow access to inlets and outlets by puncturing or unpeeling the tape. A variety of methods can be used to seal a microfluidic channel or portions of a channel, or to join multiple layers of a device, including but not limited to, the use of adhesives, use adhesive tapes, gluing, bonding, lamination of materials, or by mechanical methods (e.g., clamping, snapping mechanisms, etc.).
In some instances, a cassette comprises a combination of two or more separate layers (or cassettes) mounted together. Independent channel networks (such as sections 71 and 77 of FIG. 1A), which may optionally include reagents stored therein prior to first use, may be included on separate layers (or cassettes). The separate layers may be mounted together by any suitable means, such as by the methods described herein, to form a single cassette. In some embodiments, two or more channel networks are connected fluidically at first use, e.g., by use of a fluidic connector. In other
embodiments, two or more channel networks are connected fluidically prior to first use.
A cassette described herein may have any suitable volume for carrying out an analysis such as a chemical and/or biological reaction or other process. The entire volume of a cassette includes, for example, any reagent storage areas, measurement zones, liquid containment regions, waste areas, as well as any fluid connectors, and fluidic channels associated therewith. In some embodiments, small amounts of reagents and samples are used and the entire volume of the fluidic device is, for example, less than 10 mL, 5 mL, 1 mL, 500 μΐ^, 250 μΐ^, 100 μΐ^, 50 μΐ^, 25 μΐ^, 10 μΐ^, 5 μΐ^, or 1 μΐ^.
2300751.1 A cassette described herein may be portable and, in some embodiments, handheld. The length and/or width of the cassette may be, for example, less than or equal to 20 cm, 15 cm, 10 cm, 8 cm, 6 cm, or 5 cm. The thickness of the cassette may be, for example, less than or equal to 5cm, 3 cm, 2 cm, 1 cm, 8 mm, 5 mm, 3 mm, 2 mm, or 1 mm. Advantageously, portable devices may be suitable for use in point-of-care settings.
It should be understood that the cassettes and their respective components described herein are exemplary and that other configurations and/or types of cassettes and components can be used with the systems and methods described herein.
The methods and systems described herein may involve variety of different types of analyses, and can be used to determine a variety of different samples. In some cases, an analysis involves a chemical and/or biological reaction. In some embodiments, a chemical and/or biological reaction involves binding. Different types of binding may take place in cassettes described herein. Binding may involve the interaction between a corresponding pair of molecules that exhibit mutual affinity or binding capacity, typically specific or non-specific binding or interaction, including biochemical, physiological, and/or pharmaceutical interactions. Biological binding defines a type of interaction that occurs between pairs of molecules including proteins, nucleic acids, glycoproteins, carbohydrates, hormones and the like. Specific examples include antibody/antigen, antibody/hapten, enzyme/substrate, enzyme/inhibitor,
enzyme/cofactor, binding protein/substrate, carrier protein/substrate, lectin/carbohydrate, receptor/hormone, receptor/effector, complementary strands of nucleic acid,
protein/nucleic acid repressor/inducer, ligand/cell surface receptor, virus/ligand, etc. Binding may also occur between proteins or other components and cells. In addition, devices described herein may be used for other fluid analyses (which may or may not involve binding and/or reactions) such as detection of components, concentration, etc.
In some cases, a heterogeneous reaction (or assay) may take place in a cassette; for example, a binding partner may be associated with a surface of a channel, and the complementary binding partner may be present in the fluid phase. Other solid-phase assays that involve affinity reaction between proteins or other biomolecules (e.g., DNA, RNA, carbohydrates), or non-naturally occurring molecules, can also be performed. Non-limiting examples of typical reactions that can be performed in a cassette include
2300751.1 chemical reactions, enzymatic reactions, immuno-based reactions (e.g., antigen- antibody), and cell-based reactions.
Non- limiting examples of analytes that can be determined (e.g., detected) using cassettes described herein include specific proteins, viruses, hormones, drugs, nucleic acids and polysaccharides; specifically antibodies, e.g., IgD, IgG, IgM or IgA immunoglobulins to HTLV-I, HIV, Hepatitis A, B and non A/non B, Rubella, Measles, Human Parvovirus B19, Mumps, Malaria, Chicken Pox or Leukemia; human and animal hormones, e.g., thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), thyroxine (T4), luteinizing hormone (LH), follicle-stimulating hormones (FSH), testosterone, progesterone, human chorionic gonadotropin, estradiol; other proteins or peptides, e.g. troponin I, c-reactive protein, myoglobin, brain natriuretic protein, prostate specific antigen (PSA), free-PSA, complexed-PSA, pro-PSA, EPCA-2, PCADM-1, ABCA5, hK2, beta-MSP (PSP94), AZGP1, Annexin A3, PSCA, PSMA, JM27, PAP; drugs, e.g., paracetamol or theophylline; marker nucleic acids, e.g., PCA3, TMPRS-ERG; polysaccharides such as cell surface antigens for HLA tissue typing and bacterial cell wall material. Chemicals that may be detected include explosives such as TNT, nerve agents, and environmentally hazardous compounds such as polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), dioxins, hydrocarbons and MTBE. Typical sample fluids include physiological fluids such as human or animal whole blood, blood serum, blood plasma, semen, tears, urine, sweat, saliva, cerebro- spinal fluid, vaginal secretions; in-vitro fluids used in research or environmental fluids such as aqueous liquids suspected of being contaminated by the analyte.
In some embodiments, one or more reagents that can be used to determine an analyte of a sample (e.g., a binding partner of the analyte to be determined) is stored in a channel or chamber of a cassette prior to first use in order to perform a specific test or assay. In cases where an antigen is being analyzed, a corresponding antibody or aptamer can be the binding partner associated with a surface of a microfluidic channel. If an antibody is the analyte, then an appropriate antigen or aptamer may be the binding partner associated with the surface. When a disease condition is being determined, it may be preferred to put the antigen on the surface and to test for an antibody that has been produced in the subject. Such antibodies may include, for example, antibodies to HIV.
In some embodiments, a cassette is adapted and arranged to perform an analysis involving accumulating an opaque material on a region of a microfluidic channel,
2300751.1 exposing the region to light, and determining the transmission of light through the opaque material. An opaque material may include a substance that interferes with the transmittance of light at one or more wavelengths. An opaque material does not merely refract light, but reduces the amount of transmission through the material by, for example, absorbing or reflecting light. Different opaque materials or different amounts of an opaque material may allow transmittance of less than, for example, 90, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, 10 or 1 percent of the light illuminating the opaque material. Examples of opaque materials include molecular layers of metal (e.g., elemental metal), ceramic layers, polymeric layers, and layers of an opaque substance (e.g., a dye). The opaque material may, in some cases, be a metal that can be electrolessly deposited. These metals may include, for example, silver, copper, nickel, cobalt, palladium, and platinum.
An opaque material that forms in a channel may include a series of discontinuous independent particles that together form an opaque layer, but in one embodiment, is a continuous material that takes on a generally planar shape. The opaque material may have a dimension (e.g., a width of length) of, for example, greater than or equal to 1 micron, greater than or equal to 5 microns, greater than 10 microns, greater than or equal to 25 microns, or greater than or equal to 50 microns. In some cases, the opaque material extends across the width of the channel (e.g., a measurement zone) containing the opaque material. The opaque layer may have a thickness of, for example, less than or equal to 10 microns, less than or equal to 5 microns, less than or equal to 1 micron, less than or equal to 100 nanometers or less than or equal to 10 nanometers. Even at these small thicknesses, a detectable change in transmittance can be obtained. The opaque layer may provide an increase in assay sensitivity when compared to techniques that do not form an opaque layer.
In one set of embodiments, a cassette described herein is used for performing an immunoassay (e.g., for human IgG or PSA) and, optionally, uses silver enhancement for signal amplification. In such an immunoassay, after delivery of a sample containing human IgG to a reaction site or analysis region, binding between the human IgG and anti-human IgG can take place. One or more reagents, which may be optionally stored in a channel of the device prior to use, can then flow over this binding pair complex. One of the stored reagents may include a solution of metal colloid (e.g., a gold conjugated antibody) that specifically binds to the antigen to be detected (e.g., human IgG). This metal colloid can provide a catalytic surface for the deposition of an opaque material,
2300751.1 such as a layer of metal (e.g., silver), on a surface of the analysis region. The layer of metal can be formed by using a two component system: a metal precursor (e.g., a solution of silver salts) and a reducing agent (e.g., hydroquinone, chlorohydroquinone, pyrogallol, metol, 4-aminophenol and phenidone), which can optionally be stored in different channels prior to use.
As a positive or negative pressure differential is applied to the system, the silver salt and reducing solutions can merge at a channel intersection, where they mix (e.g., due to diffusion) in a channel, and then flow over the analysis region. Therefore, if antibody- antigen binding occurs in the analysis region, the flowing of the metal precursor solution through the region can result in the formation of an opaque layer, such as a silver layer, due to the presence of the catalytic metal colloid associated with the antibody- antigen complex. The opaque layer may include a substance that interferes with the
transmittance of light at one or more wavelengths. An opaque layer that is formed in the channel can be detected optically, for example, by measuring a reduction in light transmittance through a portion of the analysis region (e.g., a serpentine channel region) compared to a portion of an area that does not include the antibody or antigen.
Alternatively, a signal can be obtained by measuring the variation of light transmittance as a function of time, as the film is being formed in an analysis region. The opaque layer may provide an increase in assay sensitivity when compared to techniques that do not form an opaque layer. Additionally, various amplification chemistries that produce optical signals (e.g., absorbance, fluorescence, glow or flash chemiluminescence, electrochemiluminescence), electrical signals (e.g., resistance or conductivity of metal structures created by an electroless process) or magnetic signals (e.g., magnetic beads) can be used to allow detection of a signal by a detector.
Various types of fluids can be used with the cassettes described herein. As described herein, fluids may be introduced into the cassette at first use, and/or stored within the cassette prior to first use. Fluids include liquids such as solvents, solutions and suspensions. Fluids also include gases and mixtures of gases. When multiple fluids are contained in a cassette, the fluids may be separated by another fluid that is preferably substantially immiscible in each of the first two fluids. For example, if a channel contains two different aqueous solutions, a separation plug of a third fluid may be substantially immiscible in both of the aqueous solutions. When aqueous solutions are to be kept separate, substantially immiscible fluids that can be used as separators may
2300751.1 include gases such as air or nitrogen, or hydrophobic fluids that are substantially immiscible with the aqueous fluids. Fluids may also be chosen based at least in part on the fluid's reactivity with adjacent fluids. For example, an inert gas such as nitrogen may be used in some embodiments and may help preserve and/or stabilize any adjacent fluids. An example of an substantially immiscible liquid for separating aqueous solutions is perfluorodecalin. The choice of a separator fluid may be made based on other factors as well, including any effect that the separator fluid may have on the surface tension of the adjacent fluid plugs. It may be preferred to maximize the surface tension within any fluid plug to promote retention of the fluid plug as a single continuous unit under varying environmental conditions such as vibration, shock and temperature variations. Separator fluids may also be inert to a reaction site (e.g., measurement zone) to which the fluids will be supplied. For example, if a reaction site includes a biological binding partner, a separator fluid such as air or nitrogen may have little or no effect on the binding partner. The use of a gas (e.g., air) as a separator fluid may also provide room for expansion within a channel of a fluidic device should liquids contained in the device expand or contract due to changes such as temperature (including freezing) or pressure variations.
As described herein, a cassette may be configured to operate with an analyzer in some embodiments. For example, the cassette shown illustratively in FIG. 5 may have a cammed surface along a side portion of the cassette. In this particular embodiment, the cammed surface includes a notch 230 formed at one end of the cassette. The other end of the cassette includes a curved surface 232. This cammed surface of the cassette may be configured to interact with a sample analyzer such that the analyzer can detect the presence of the cassette within the housing of the analyzer and/or position the cassette within the analyzer.
FIG. 7 shows an example of an analyzer 301 that may be configured to receive a cassette. The analyzer may include a fluid flow source 40 (e.g., a pressure-control system) which may be fluidly connected to the channels 206, 207, 222 (e.g., of FIG. 6) to pressurize the channels to move the sample and/or other reagents through the channels. In particular, the fluid flow source 40 may be configured to move a sample and/or reagent initially from the substantially U-shaped channel 222 into the first channel 206. The fluid flow source 40 may also be used to move the reagents in the second channel 207 through the substantially U-shaped channel 222 and into the first channel 206. After
2300751.1 the sample and reagents pass through the measurement zones 209 and are analyzed, the fluid flow source 40 may be configured to move the fluids into the absorbent material 217 of the cassette 200. In one embodiment, the fluid flow source is a vacuum system. It should be understood, however, that other sources of fluid flow such as valves, pumps, and/or other components can be used.
Analyzer 301 may be used in a variety of ways to process and analyze a sample placed within the analyzer. In one particular embodiment, once a mechanical component configured to interface with the cassette indicates that the cassette 20 is properly loaded in the analyzer 301, the identification reader reads and identifies information associated with the cassette 20. The analyzer 301 may be configured to compare the information to data stored in a control system to ensure that it has calibration information for this particular sample (such as a calibration curve or expected values for any measurements made during an assay). In the event that the analyzer does not have the proper calibration information, the analyzer may output a request to the user to upload the specific information needed. This information can be uploaded using, for example, the same identification reader which reads the cassette information. It could also be uploaded using a separate identification reader or by some other method. The analyzer may also be configured to review expiration date information associated with the cassette and cancel the analysis if the expiration date has passed.
In one embodiment, once the analyzer has determined that the cassette may be analyzed, a fluid flow source such as a vacuum manifold may be configured to contact the cassette to ensure a fluid-tight seal around a vacuum port and vent ports of the cassette. In one embodiment, an optical system may take initial measurements to obtain reference readings. Such reference readings may be taken both with light sources (e.g., 82, 86 of FIG. 7) activated and deactivated.
To initiate movement of the sample, fluid flow source 40 (e.g., a vacuum system) may be activated, which may rapidly change the pressure within the channel 206, 207 (e.g., reduced to approximately -30kPa). This reduction of pressure within the channel may drive the sample into the channel 206 and through each of the measurement zones 209A-209D (see FIG. 6). After the sample reaches the final measurement zone 209D, the sample may continue to flow into the liquid containment region 217.
In one particular embodiment, the microfluidic sample analyzer 301 is used to measure the level of a prostate specific antigen (PSA) in a blood sample. In this
2300751.1 embodiment, four measurement zones 209A-209D may be utilized to analyze the sample. For example, in a first measurement zone, the walls of the channel may be blocked with a blocking protein (such as Bovine Serum Albumin) such that little or no proteins in the blood sample attach to the walls of the measurement zone 209 (except for perhaps some non-specific binding which may be washed off). This first measurement zone may act as a negative control.
In a second measurement zone 209, the walls of the channel 206 may be coated with a predetermined large quantity of a prostate specific antigen (PSA) to act as a high or positive control. As the blood sample passes through the second measurement zone 209, little or no PSA proteins in the blood may bind to the walls of the channel. Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may be dissolved from inside of the fluidic connector tube 222 or may be flowed from any other suitable location. These antibodies may not yet be bound to the PSA in the sample, and thus they may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a high or positive control.
In a third measurement zone 209, the walls of the channel 206 may be coated with a predetermined small quantity of PSA to act as a low control. As the blood sample flows through this measurement zone 209, no PSA proteins in the sample bind to the wall of the channel. Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may be dissolved from inside of the fluidic connector tube 222 (which are not yet bound to the PSA in the sample) or may be flowed from any other suitable location, and may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a low control.
In a fourth measurement zone 209, the walls of the channel 206 may be coated with the capture antibody, an anti-PSA antibody, which binds to a different epitope on the PSA protein than the gold conjugated signal antibody. As the blood sample flows through the fourth measurement zone, PSA proteins in the blood sample may bind to the anti-PSA antibody in a way that is proportional to the concentration of these proteins in the blood. Thus, in one embodiment, the first three measurement zones 209 may act as controls and the fourth measurement zone 209 may actually test the sample.
In some instances, measurements from a region that analyzes the sample (e.g., the fourth measurement zone described above) can be used not only to determine the concentration of an analyte in a sample, but also as a control as well. For example, a threshold measurement can be established at an early phase of amplification.
Measurements above this value (or below this value) may indicate that the concentration
2300751.1 of analyte is outside the desired range for the assay. This technique may be used to identify, for example, whether a High Dose Hook Effect is taking place during the analysis, i.e., when a very high concentration of analyte gives an artificially low reading.
In other embodiments, different numbers of measurement zones can be provided, and an analysis may optionally include more than one measurement zones that actually test the sample. Additional measurement zones can be used to measure additional analytes so that the system can perform multiplex assays simultaneously with a single sample.
In one particular embodiment, it takes approximately eight minutes for a 10 microliter blood sample to flow through the four measurement zones 209. The start of this analysis may be calculated when the pressure within the channel 206 is
approximately -30kPa. During this time, the optical system 80 is measuring the light transmission for each measurement zone, and in one embodiment, this data may be transmitted to a control system approximately every 0.1 seconds. Using reference values, these measurements may be converted using the following formulas:
Transmission = (1-ld)/ (lr-ld) (1)
Where:
1 = the intensity of transmitted light through a measurement zone at a given point in time
Id = the intensity of transmitted light through a measurement zone with the light source off
lr = a reference intensity (i.e. the intensity of the transmitted light at a measurement zone with the light source activated, or before the start of an analysis when only air is in the channel and
Optical Density = -log(Transmission)
Thus, using these formulas, the optical density in a measurement zone 209 may be calculated.
As described herein, a variety of methods can be used to control fluid flow in a cassette, including the use of pumps, vacuums, valves, and other components associated with an analyzer. In some cases, fluid control can also be performed at least in part by
2300751.1 one or more components within the cassette, such as by using a valve positioned within the cassette, or the use of specific fluids and channel configurations with the cassette. In one set of embodiments, control of fluid flow can be achieved based at least in part on the influence of channel geometry and the viscosity of one or more fluids (which may be stored) inside the cassette.
One method includes flowing a plug of a low viscosity fluid and a plug of a high viscosity fluid in a channel including a flow constriction region and a non-constriction region. In one embodiment, the low viscosity fluid flows at a first flow rate in the channel and the flow rate is not substantially affected by the fluid flowing in the flow constriction region. When the high viscosity fluid flows from the non-constriction region to the flow constriction region, the flow rates of the fluids decrease substantially, since the flow rates, in some systems, are influenced by the highest viscosity fluid flowing in the smallest cross-sectional area of the system (e.g., the flow constriction region). This causes the low viscosity fluid to flow at a second, slower flow rate than its original flow rate, e.g., at the same flow rate at which the high viscosity fluid flows in the flow constriction region.
For example, one method of controlling fluid flow may involve flowing a first fluid from a first channel portion to a second channel portion in a microfluidic system, wherein a fluid path defined by the first channel portion has a larger cross-sectional area than a cross-sectional area of a fluid path defined by the second channel portion, and flowing a second fluid in a third channel portion in the microfluidic system in fluid communication with the first and second channel portions, wherein the viscosity of the first fluid is different than the viscosity of the second fluid, and wherein the first and second fluids are substantially incompressible. Without stopping the first or second fluids, a volumetric flow rate of the first and second fluids may be decreased by a factor of at least 3, at least 10, at least 20, at least 30, at least 40, or at least 50 in the microfluidic system as a result of the first fluid flowing from the first channel portion to the second channel portion, compared to the absence of flowing the first fluid from the first channel portion to the second channel portion. A chemical and/or biological interaction involving a component of the first or second fluids may take place at a first measurement zone in fluid communication with the channel portions while the first and second fluids are flowing at the decreased flow rate.
2300751.1 Accordingly, by designing microfluidic systems with flow constriction regions positioned at particular locations and by choosing appropriate viscosities of fluids, a fluid can be made to speed up or slow down at different locations within the system without the use of valves and/or without external control. In addition, the length of the channel portions can be chosen to allow a fluid to remain in a particular area of the system for a certain period of time. Such systems are particularly useful for performing chemical and/or biological assays, as well as other applications in which timing of reagents is important.
Any suitable fluid flow source may be used to promote or maintain fluid flow in a microfluidic system or cassette described herein. In some cases, the fluid flow source is part of a microfluidic sample analyzer. A fluid flow source may be configured to pressurize a channel in a cassette to move a sample through the channel. In one illustrative embodiment, the fluid flow source is a vacuum system and includes a vacuum source or pump, two vacuum reservoirs which may be separated by a vacuum regulator and a manifold to provide a fluid connection between the vacuum reservoirs and the cassette. The manifold may also include one or more fluid connections to one or more ports on the cassette. For example, the manifold may provide a fluidic connection between a port and a valve (such as a solenoid valve). Opening and closing this valve may control where air can enter the cassette, thus serving as a vent valve in certain embodiments.
As mentioned above, in one embodiment, the vacuum source is a pump, such as a solenoid operated diaphragm pump. In other embodiments, fluid flow may be driven/controlled via use of other types of pumps or sources of fluid flow. For example, in one embodiment, a syringe pump may be used to create a vacuum by pulling the syringe plunger in an outward direction. In other embodiments, a positive pressure is applied to one or more inlets of the cassette to provide a source of fluid flow.
In some embodiments, fluid flow takes place while applying a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop (i.e., AP) across an inlet and an outlet of a cassette. In one set of embodiments, an entire analysis is performed while applying a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop (i.e., AP) across an inlet and an outlet of a cassette. A substantially constant non-zero pressure drop can be achieved, for example, by applying a positive pressure at the inlet or a reduced pressure (e.g., a vacuum) at the outlet. In some cases, a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop is achieved while fluid flow
2300751.1 does not take place predominately by capillary forces and/or without the use of actuating valves (e.g., without changing a cross-sectional area of a channel of a fluid path of the cassette). In some embodiments, during essentially the entire analysis conducted in the cassette, a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop may be present across, for example, an inlet to a measurement zone (which may be connected to a fluidic connector) and an outlet downstream of the measurement zone (e.g., an outlet downstream of a liquid containment region), respectively.
In one embodiment, a vacuum source is configured to pressurize a channel to approximately -60kPa (approximately 2/3 atmosphere). In another embodiment, the vacuum source is configured to pressurize a channel to approximately -30kPa. In certain embodiments, a vacuum sources is configured to pressurize a channel to, for example, between -lOOkPa and -70kPa, between -70kPa and -50kPa, between -50kPa and -20kPa, or between -20kPa and -lkPa.
As mentioned above, in one embodiment, two vacuum reservoirs may be provided. The pump may be turned on such that the first reservoir may be pressurized to approximately -60kPa. A regulator positioned between the reservoirs may ensure that the second reservoir may only be pressurized to a different pressure, for example, approximately -30kPa. This regulator may maintain the pressure of a reservoir at -30kPa (or at another suitable pressure) as long as the other reservoir remains at a certain pressure range, e.g., between -60kPa and -30kPa. Pressure sensors may monitor the pressure within each reservoir. If the pressure in the first reservoir reaches a set point (for example, approximately -40kPa), the pump may be actuated to decrease the pressure in the first reservoir. The second reservoir may be configured to detect any leaks in the overall vacuum system. Optionally, the vacuum system may include a filter coupled to the reservoirs. A solenoid valve may serve as a vent valve connected through the manifold to a port.
In certain embodiments, once the cassette is positioned within an analyzer, a fluid flow source that is a part of the analyzer may be coupled to the cassette to ensure a fluid- tight connection. For instance, the cassette may include a port configured to couple a channel of the cassette with the fluid source, and optionally to another channel of the cassette. In one embodiment, seals, or o-rings are positioned around the port and a linear solenoid may be positioned above the o-rings to press and seal the o-rings against the cassette body. A manifold adapter may be positioned between the linear solenoid and
2300751.1 the manifold, and passive return springs may be provided around the manifold to urge the manifold away from the cassette body when the solenoid is not charged. In one embodiment, multiple ports on the cassette may interface with the manifold. For example, in addition to a port for inserting and/or removing reagents, the cassette may also include one or more venting ports and/or mixing ports. The interface between each port and the manifold may be independent (e.g., there may be no fluidic connection inside the manifold).
In one embodiment, when the fluid flow source is activated, one or more channels in the cassette may be pressurized (e.g., to approximately -30kPa) which may drive the fluids within the channel (e.g., both fluid sample as well as reagents) toward the outlet. In an embodiment which includes a vent port and a mixing port, a vent valve connected to the vent port through a manifold may initially be open which may enable all of the reagents downstream of the mixing port to move toward the outlet, but will not cause reagents upstream of the mixing port to move. Once the vent valve is closed, reagents upstream of the mixing port may move toward a mixing port and then to the outlet. For example, fluids can be stored serially in a channel upstream of the mixing port, and after closing a vent valve positioned along the channel, the fluids can flow sequentially towards the channel outlet. In some cases, fluids can be stored in separate, intersecting channels, and after closing a vent valve the fluids will flow together toward a point of intersection. This set of embodiments can be used, for example, to controllably mix the fluids as they flow together. The timing of delivery and the volume of fluid delivered can be controlled, for example, by the timing of the vent valve actuation.
Advantageously, vent valves can be operated without constricting the cross- section of the microfluidic channel on which they operate, as might occur with certain valves in the prior art. Such a mode of operation can be effective in preventing leaking across the valve. Moreover, because vent valves can be used, some systems and methods described herein do not require the use of certain internal valves, which can be problematic due to, for example, their high expense, complexity in fabrication, fragility, limited compatibility with mixed gas and liquid systems, and/or unreliability in microfluidic systems.
It should be understood that while vent valves are described, other types of valving mechanisms can be used with the systems and methods described herein. Non- limiting examples of a valving mechanism which may be operatively associated with a
2300751.1 valve include a diaphragm valve, ball valve, gate valve, butterfly valve, globe valve, needle valve, pinch valve, poppet valve, or pinch valve. The valving mechanism may be actuated by any suitable means, including a solenoid, a motor, by hand, by electronic actuation, or by hydraulic/pneumatic pressure.
As previously mentioned, all of the liquids in the cassette (e.g., sample and reagents) may move into the liquid containment area which may include an absorbent material. In one embodiment, the absorbent material absorbs only liquids such that gases may flow out of the cassette through the outlet.
A variety of determination (e.g., measuring, quantifying, detecting, and qualifying) techniques may be used, e.g., to analyze a sample component or other component or condition associated with a microfluidic system or cassette described herein. Determination techniques may include optically-based techniques such as light transmission, light absorbance, light scattering, light reflection and visual techniques. Determination techniques may also include luminescence techniques such as photoluminescence (e.g., fluorescence), chemiluminescence, bioluminescence, and/or electrochemiluminescence. In other embodiments, determination techniques may measure conductivity or resistance. As such, an analyzer may be configured to include such and other suitable detection systems.
Different optical detection techniques provide a number of options for determining reaction (e.g., assay) results. In some embodiments, the measurement of transmission or absorbance means that light can be detected at the same wavelength at which it is emitted from a light source. Although the light source can be a narrow band source emitting at a single wavelength it may also may be a broad spectrum source, emitting over a range of wavelengths, as many opaque materials can effectively block a wide range of wavelengths. In some embodiments, a system may be operated with a minimum of optical devices (e.g., a simplified optical detector). For instance, the determining device may be free of a photomultiplier, may be free of a wavelength selector such as a grating, prism or filter, may be free of a device to direct or columnate light such as a columnator, or may be free of magnifying optics (e.g., lenses).
Elimination or reduction of these features can result in a less expensive, more robust device.
In one set of embodiments, an optical system is positioned in the housing of an analyzer. As shown illustratively in FIG. 7, an optical system 80 includes at least a first
2300751.1 light source 82 and a detector 84 spaced apart from the first light source. The first light source 82 may be configured to pass light through a first measurement zone of the cassette 20 when the cassette is inserted into the analyzer 301. The first detector 84 may be positioned opposite the first light source 82 to detect the amount of light that passes through the first measurement zone of the cassette. In one particular embodiment, the optical system includes ten light sources and ten detectors. It should be appreciated that in other embodiments, the number of light sources and detectors may vary as the invention is not so limited. As described herein, the cassette may include a plurality of measurement zones and the cassette may be positioned within the analyzer such that each measurement zone aligns with a light source and corresponding detector. In some embodiments, the light source includes an optical aperture which may help direct light from the light source to a particular region within a measurement zone of the cassette.
In one embodiment, the light sources are light emitting diodes (LED's) or laser diodes. For example, an InGaAlP red semiconductor laser diode emitting at 654 nm may be used. Other light sources can also be used. The light source may be positioned within a nest or housing. The nest or housing may include a narrow aperture or thin tube that may assist in collimating light. The light sources may be positioned above where the cassette is inserted into the analyzer such that the light source shines down onto the top surface of the cassette. Other suitable configurations of the light source with respect to the cassette are also possible.
It should be appreciated that the wavelength of the light sources may vary as the invention is not so limited. For example, in one embodiment, the wavelength of the light source is approximately 670 nm, and in another embodiment, the wavelength of the light source is approximately 650 nm. It should be appreciated that in one embodiment, the wavelength of each light source may be different such that each measurement zone of the cassette receives a different light wavelength. In one particular embodiment when measuring hemocrit or hemoglobin, an isobestic wavelength range between
approximately 590 nm and approximately 805 nm may be used for at least one of the measurement zones.
As mentioned, a detector 84 may be spaced apart from and positioned below a light source to detect the amount of light that passes through the cassette. In one embodiment, one or more of the detectors are photodetectors (e.g., photodiodes). In certain embodiments, the photodetector may be any suitable device capable of detecting
2300751.1 the transmission of light that is emitted by the light source. One type of photodetector is an optical integrated circuit (IC) including a photodiode having a peak sensitivity at 700 nm, an amplifier and a voltage regulator. The detector may be positioned within a nest or housing which may include a narrow aperture or thin tube to ensure that only light from the center of the measurement zone is measured at the detector. As described in more detail below, if the light source is pulse modulated, the photodetector may include a filter to remove the effect of light that is not at the selected frequency. When multiple and neighboring signals are detected at the same time, the light source used for each measurement zone (e.g., detection region) can be modulated at a frequency sufficiently different from that of its neighboring light source. In this configuration, the each detector can be configured (e.g., using software) to select for its attributed light source, thereby avoiding interfering light form neighboring optical pairs.
As described herein, a cassette may include a measurement zone which includes a meandering channel configured and arranged to align with a detector such that upon alignment, the detector can measure a single signal through more than one adjacent segment of the meandering channel. In some embodiments, the detector is able to detect a signal within at least a portion of the area of the meandering channel and through more than one segment of the meandering channel such that a first portion of the signal, measured from a first segment of the meandering channel, is similar to a second portion of the signal, measured from a second segment of the meandering channel. In such embodiments, because the signal is present as a part of more than one segment of the meandering channel, there is no need for precise alignment between a detector and a measurement zone.
The positioning of the detector over the measurement zone (e.g., a meandering region) without the need for precision is an advantage, since external (and possibly, expensive) equipment such as microscopes, lenses, and alignment stages are not required (although they may be used in certain embodiments). Instead, alignment may be performed by low-cost methods that do not necessarily require an active or separate alignment step by the user. For example, in one embodiment, a cassette comprising a meandering region can be placed in a slot of an analyzer described herein (e.g., in a cavity having the same or similar shape as the cassette), and the measurement zone can be automatically located in a beam of light of the detector. Possible causes of misalignment caused by, for instance, cassette -to- cassette variations, the exact location
2300751.1 of the cassette in the slot, and normal usage of the cassette, may be negligible compared to the dimensions of the measurement zone. As a result, the meandering region can stay within the beam of light and detection is not interrupted due to these variations.
The detector may detect a signal within all, or a portion, of a measurement zone (e.g., including a meandering region). In other words, different amounts of the meandering region may be used as an optical detection pathway. For instance, the detector may detect a signal within at least 15% of the measurement zone, at least 20% of the measurement zone, at least 25% of the measurement zone, within at least 50% of the measurement zone, or within at least 75% of the measurement zone (but less than 100% of the measurement zone). The area in which the measurement zone is used as an optical detection pathway may also depend on, for instance, the opacity of the material in which the channel is fabricated (e.g., whether all, or, a portion, of the channel is transparent), the amount of a non- transparent material that may cover a portion of the channel (e.g., via use of a protective cover), and/or the size of the detector and the measurement zone.
In one embodiment, a signal produced by a reaction carried out in the cassette is homogenous over the entire measurement zone (e.g., over an entire meandering channel region). That is, the measurement zone (e.g., meandering channel region) may allow production and/or detection of a single, homogenous signal in said region upon carrying out a chemical and/or biological reaction (e.g., and upon detection by a detector). Prior to carrying out a reaction in the meandering channel region, the meandering channel may include, for example, a single species (and concentration of species) to be
detected/determined. The species may be adsorbed to a surface of the meandering channel. In another embodiment, the signal may be homogeneous over only portions of the meandering region, and one or more detectors may detect different signals within each of the portions. In certain instances, more than one measurement zone can be connected in series and each measurement zone can be used to detect/determine a different species. It should be understood that while meandering regions are described, measurement zones that do not include meandering regions can also be used.
Applicant has recognized that the amount of light transmitted through a measurement zone of the cassette may be used to determine information about not only the sample, but also information about specific processes occurring in the fluidic system of the cassette (e.g., mixing of reagents, flow rate, etc.). In some cases, measurement of
2300751.1 light through a region can be used as feedback to control fluid flow in the system, as described herein.
In some cases, optical density of a fluid is determined. It should be recognized that a clear liquid (such as water) may allow a large amount of light to be transmitted from the light source, through a measurement zone and to a detector. Air within the measurement zone may lead to less light transmitted through the measurement zone because more light may scatter within the channel compared to when a clear liquid is present. When a blood sample is in a measurement zone, a significantly less amount of light may pass through to the detector due to the light scattering off of blood cells and also due to absorbance. In one embodiment, silver associates with a sample component bound to a surface within the measurement zone and as silver builds up within the measurement zone, less and less light is transmitted through the measurement zone.
It is recognized that measuring the amount of light that is detected at each detector enables a user to determine which reagents are in a particular measurement zone at a particular point in time. It is also recognized that by measuring the amount of light that is detected with each detector, it is possible to measure the amount of silver deposited in each measurement zone. This amount may correspond to the amount of analyte captured during a reaction which may thus provide a measure of the
concentration of the analyte in the sample.
As described herein, Applicant has recognized that an optical system may be used for a variety of quality control reasons. First, the time it takes for a sample to reach a measurement zone where the optical system detects the light that passes though the measurement zone may be used to determine whether there is a leak or clog in the system. Also, when the sample is expected to be a certain volume, for example, approximately 10 microliters, there is an expected flow time which would be associated for the sample to pass through the channels and measurement zones. If the sample falls outside of that expected flow time, it could be an indication that there is not enough sample to conduct the analysis and/or that the wrong type of sample was loaded into the analyzer. Additionally, an expected range of results may be determined based upon the type of sample (e.g., serum, blood, urine, etc.) and if the sample is outside of the expected range, it could be an indication of an error.
In one embodiment, an optical system includes a plurality of light sources and a plurality of corresponding detectors. In one embodiment, a first light source is adjacent a
2300751.1 second light source, where the first light source is configured to pass light though a first measurement zone of a cassette and the second light source is configured to pass light through a second measurement zone of the cassette. In one embodiment, the light sources are configured such that the second light source is not activated unless the first light source is deactivated. Applicant has recognized that some light from one light source may spread over to an adjacent detector and may affect the amount of light detected at the adjacent detector. In one set of embodiments, if the adjacent light source is activated at the same time as the first light source, then both detectors are also measuring the amount of light that passes through the first and second measurement zones of the cassette at the same time, which may lead to inaccurate measurements.
Thus, in one set of embodiments, the plurality of light sources are configured to activate sequentially with only one light source activated at a time. The corresponding detector for the activated light source is thus only detecting the amount of light that passes through the corresponding measurement zone. In one particular embodiment, the light sources are configured to each activate for a short period of time (e.g., at least approximately 500, 250, 100, or 50 microseconds, or, in some embodiments, less than or equal to approximately 500, 250, 100, or 50 microseconds), and then an adjacent light source is configured to activate for a similar time frame. Activation for 100
microseconds corresponds to a rate of 10 kHz. In one embodiment, a multiplexed analog to digital converter is used to pulse the light and measure the amount of light detected at each corresponding detector every 500, 250, 100, or 50 microseconds. Pulsing the light in this manner may help to prevent stray light passing through one measurement zone to alter the amount of light detected that passes through an adjacent measurement zone.
Although there may be some benefits associated with pulsing the light sources in the manner described above, it should be recognized that the invention is not so limited and that other arrangements may be possible, such as where multiple light sources may be activated at the same time. For example, in one embodiment, light sources that are not directly adjacent to one another can be activated substantially simultaneously.
In one embodiment, an analyzer includes a temperature regulating system positioned within the housing which may be configured to regulate the temperature within the analyzer. For certain sample analysis, the sample may need to be kept within a certain temperature range. For example, in one embodiment, it is desirable to maintain the temperature within the analyzer at approximately 37°C. Accordingly, in one
2300751.1 embodiment, the temperature regulating system includes a heater configured to heat the cassette. In one embodiment, the heater is a resistive heater which may be positioned on the underside of where the cassette is placed in the analyzer. In one embodiment, the temperature regulating system also includes a thermistor to measure the temperature of the cassette and a controller circuit may be provided to control the temperature.
In one embodiment, the passive flow of air within the analyzer may act to cool the air within the analyzer if needed. A fan (not shown) may optionally be provided in the analyzer to lower the temperature within the analyzer. In some embodiments, the temperature regulating system may include Peltier thermoelectric heaters and/or coolers within the analyzer.
In certain embodiments, an identification system including one or more identifiers is used and associated with one or more components or materials associated with a cassette and/or analyzer. The "identifiers," as described in greater detail below, may themselves be "encoded with" information (i.e. carry or contain information, such as by use of an information carrying, storing, generating, or conveying device such as a radio frequency identification (RFID) tag or bar code) about the component including the identifier, or may not themselves be encoded with information about the component, but rather may only be associated with information that may be contained in, for example, a database on a computer or on a computer readable medium (e.g., information about a user, and/or sample to be analyzed). In the latter instance, detection of such an identifier can trigger retrieval and usage of the associated information from the database.
Identifiers "encoded with" information about a component need not necessarily be encoded with a complete set of information about the component. For example, in certain embodiments, an identifier may be encoded with information merely sufficient to enable a unique identification of the cassette (e.g. relating to a serial no., part no., etc.), while additional information relating to the cassette (e.g. type, use (e.g., type of assay), ownership, location, position, connectivity, contents, etc.) may be stored remotely and be only associated with the identifier.
"Information about" or "information associated with" a cassette, material, or component, etc. is information regarding the identity, positioning, or location of the cassette, material or component or the identity, positioning, or location of the contents of a cassette, material or component and may additionally include information regarding the nature, state or composition of the cassette, material, component or contents.
2300751.1 "Information about" or "information associated with" a cassette, material or component or its contents can include information identifying the cassette, material or component or its contents and distinguishing the cassette, material, component or its contents from others. For example, "information about" or "information associated with" a cassette, material or component or its contents may refer to information indicating the type or what the cassette, material or component or its contents is, where it is or should be located, how it is or should be positioned, the function or purpose of the cassette, material or component or its contents, how the cassette, material or component or its contents is to be connected with other components of the system, the lot number, origin, calibration information, expiration date, destination, manufacturer or ownership of the cassette, material or component or its contents, the type of analysis/assay to be performed in the cassette, information about whether the cassette has been
used/analyzed, etc.
In one set of embodiments, an identifier is associated with a cassette and/or analyzer described herein. In general, as used herein, the term "identifier" refers to an item capable of providing information about the cassette and/or analyzer (e.g.
information including one or more of identity, location, or position/positioning of the cassette and/or analyzer or a component thereof) with which the identifier is associated or installed into, or capable of being identified or detected and the identification or detection event being associated with information about the cassette and/or analyzer with which the identifier is associated. Non-limiting examples of identifiers that may be used in the context of the invention include radio frequency identification (RFID) tags, bar codes, serial numbers, color tags, fluorescent or optical tags (e.g., using quantum dots), chemical compounds, radio tags, magnetic tags, among others.
In one embodiment, an analyzer may include an identification reader positioned within the housing configured to read information about with the cassette. Any suitable identification reader that can be used to read information from an identifier. Non- limiting examples of identification readers include RFID readers, bar code scanners, chemical detectors, cameras, radiation detectors, magnetic or electric field detectors, among others. The method of detection/reading and appropriate type of identification detector depends on the particular identifier utilized and can include, for example, optical imaging, fluorescence excitation and detection, mass spectrometry, nuclear magnetic resonance, sequencing, hybridization, electrophoresis, spectroscopy, microscopy, etc. In
2300751.1 some embodiments, the identification readers may be mounted or pre-embedded in specific locations (e.g., on or within a cassette and/or analyzer).
In one embodiment, the identification reader is an RFID reader configured to read an RFID identifier associated with the cassette. For example, in one embodiment, the analyzer includes an RFID module and antenna that are configured to read information from the cassette inserted into the analyzer. In another embodiment, the identification reader is a barcode reader configured to read a barcode associated with the cassette. Once the cassette is inserted into the analyzer, the identification reader may read the information from the cassette. The identifier on the cassette may include one or more of the types of information such as cassette type, type of analysis/assay to be performed, lot number, information about whether the cassette has been used/analyzed, and other information described herein. The reader may also be configured to read information provided with a group of cassettes, such as in a box of cassettes, such as, but not limited to calibration information, expiration date, and any additional information specific to that lot. The information identified may be optionally displayed to a user, e.g., to confirm that a correct cassette and/or type of assay is being performed.
In some cases, the identification reader may be integrated with a control system via communication pathways. Communication between the identification readers and the control system may occur along a hard-wired network or may be transmitted wirelessly. In one embodiment, the control system can be programmed to recognize a specific identifier (e.g., of a cassette associated with information relating to a cassette type, manufacturer, assay to be performed, etc.) as indicating the cassette is suitably connected or inserted within a particular type of analyzer.
In one embodiment, the identifier of a cassette be associated with predetermined or programmed information contained in a database regarding the use of the system or cassette for a particular purpose, user or product, or with particular reaction conditions, sample types, reagents, users, and the like. If an incorrect match is detected or an identifier has been deactivated, the process may be halted or the system may be rendered not operable until the user has been notified, or upon acknowledgement by a user.
The information from or associated with an identifier can, in some embodiments, be stored, for example in computer memory or on a computer readable medium, for future reference and record-keeping purposes. For example, certain control systems may employ information from or associated with identifiers to identify which components
2300751.1 (e.g., cassettes) or type of cassettes were used in a particular analysis, the date, time, and duration of use, the conditions of use, etc. Such information may be used, for example, to determine whether one or more components of the analyzer should be cleaned or replaced. Optionally, a control system or any other suitable system could generate a report from gathered information, including information encoded by or associated with the identifiers, that may be used in providing proof of compliance with regulatory standards or verification of quality control.
Information encoded on or associated with an identifier may also be used, for example, to determine whether the component associated with the identifier (e.g., a cassette) is authentic or counterfeit. In some embodiments, the determination of the presence of a counterfeit component causes system lockout. In one example, the identifier may contain a unique identity code. In this example, the process control software or analyzer would not permit system startup (e.g., the system may be disabled) if a foreign or mismatched identity code (or no identity code) was detected.
In certain embodiments, the information obtained from or associated with an identifier can be used to verify the identity of a customer to whom the cassette and/or analyzer is sold or for whom a biological, chemical, or pharmaceutical process is to be performed. In some cases, the information obtained from or associated with an identifier is used as part of a process of gathering data for troubleshooting a system. The identifier may also contain or be associated with information such as batch histories, assembly process and instrumentation diagrams (P and IDs), troubleshooting histories, among others. Troubleshooting a system may be accomplished, in some cases, via remote access or include the use of diagnostic software.
In one embodiment, an analyzer includes a user interface, which may be positioned within the housing and configured for a user to input information into the sample analyzer. In one embodiment, the user interface includes a touch screen. The touch screen may guide a user through the operation of the analyzer, providing text and/or graphical instructions for use of the analyzer. The user interface may guide the user to input the patient's name or other patient identification source/number into the analyzer. Any suitable patient information such as name, date of birth, and/or patient ID number may be inputted into the touch screen user interface to identify the patient. The user interface may indicate the amount of time remaining to complete the analysis of the sample.
2300751.1 In another embodiment, the user interface may be configured differently, such as with an LCD display and a single button scroll through menu. In another embodiment, the user interface may simply include a start button to activate the analyzer. In other embodiments, the user interface from separate independent devices (such as a smart phone or mobile computer) can be used to interface with the analyzer.
FIG. 8 is a block diagram 300 that illustrates how a control system 305 (see FIG. 7) may be operatively associated with a variety of different components according to one embodiment. Control systems described herein can be implemented in numerous ways, such as with dedicated hardware or firmware, using a processor that is programmed using microcode or software to perform the functions recited above or any suitable combination of the foregoing. A control system may control one or more operations of a single analysis (e.g., for a biological, biochemical or chemical reaction), or of multiple (separate or interconnected) analyses. As shown illustratively in FIG. 7, control system 305 may be positioned within the housing 101 of the analyzer and may be configured to communicate with the identification reader 60, the user interface 200, the fluid flow source 40, the optical system 80, and/or the temperature regulating system to analyze a sample in the cassette.
In one embodiment, the control system includes at least two processors, including a real time processor that controls and monitors all of the sub-systems which directly interface with the cassette. In one embodiment, at a particular time interval (e.g., every 0.1 seconds), this processor communicates with a second higher level processor which communicates with the user through the user interface and/or the communication subsystem (discussed below) and directs the operation of the analyzer (e.g., determines when to start analyzing a sample and interprets the results). In one embodiment, communication between these two processors occurs through a serial communication bus. It should be appreciated that in another embodiment, the analyzer may only include one processor, or more than two processors, as the invention is not so limited.
In one embodiment, the analyzer is capable of interfacing with external devices and may, for example, include ports for connection with one or more external communication units. External communication may be accomplished, for example, via USB communication. For example, as shown illustratively in FIG. 8, the analyzer may output the results of a sample analysis to a USB printer 400, or to a computer 402.
Additionally, the data stream produced by the real time processor may be outputted to a
2300751.1 computer or a USB memory stick 404. In some embodiments, a computer may be able to directly control the analyzer through a USB connection as well. Further, other types of communication options are available as the present invention is not limited in this respect. For example, Ethernet, Bluetooth and/or WI-FI communication 406 with the analyzer may be established through the processor.
The calculation methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements described herein may be implemented using a computer implemented control system, such as the various embodiments of computer implemented systems described below. The methods, steps, systems, and system elements described herein are not limited in their implementation to any specific computer system described herein, as many other different machines may be used.
The computer implemented control system can be part of or coupled in operative association with a sample analyzer, and, in some embodiments, configured and/or programmed to control and adjust operational parameters of the sample analyzer, as well as analyze and calculate values, as described above. In some embodiments, the computer implemented control system can send and receive reference signals to set and/or control operating parameters of the sample analyzer and, optionally, other system apparatus. In other embodiments, the computer implemented system can be separate from and/or remotely located with respect to the sample analyzer and may be configured to receive data from one or more remote sample analyzer apparatus via indirect and/or portable means, such as via portable electronic data storage devices, such as magnetic disks, or via communication over a computer network, such as the Internet or a local intranet.
A computer implemented control system may include several known components and circuitry, including a processing unit (i.e., processor), a memory system, input and output devices and interfaces (e.g., an interconnection mechanism), as well as other components, such as transport circuitry (e.g., one or more busses), a video and audio data input/output (I O) subsystem, special-purpose hardware, as well as other components and circuitry, as described below in more detail. Further, the computer system may be a multi-processor computer system or may include multiple computers connected over a computer network.
The computer implemented control system may include a processor, for example, a commercially available processor such as one of the series x86, Celeron and Pentium processors, available from Intel, similar devices from AMD and Cyrix, the 680X0 series
2300751.1 microprocessors available from Motorola, and the PowerPC microprocessor from IBM. Many other processors are available, and the computer system is not limited to a particular processor.
A processor typically executes a program called an operating system, of which WindowsNT, Windows 95 or 98, UNIX, Linux, DOS, VMS, MacOS and OS8 are examples, which controls the execution of other computer programs and provides scheduling, debugging, input/output control, accounting, compilation, storage assignment, data management and memory management, communication control and related services. The processor and operating system together define a computer platform for which application programs in high-level programming languages are written. The computer implemented control system is not limited to a particular computer platform.
The computer implemented control system may include a memory system, which typically includes a computer readable and writeable non-volatile recording medium, of which a magnetic disk, optical disk, a flash memory and tape are examples. Such a recording medium may be removable, for example, a floppy disk, read/write CD or memory stick, or may be permanent, for example, a hard drive.
Such a recording medium stores signals, typically in binary form (i.e., a form interpreted as a sequence of one and zeros). A disk (e.g., magnetic or optical) has a number of tracks, on which such signals may be stored, typically in binary form, i.e., a form interpreted as a sequence of ones and zeros. Such signals may define a software program, e.g., an application program, to be executed by the microprocessor, or information to be processed by the application program.
The memory system of the computer implemented control system also may include an integrated circuit memory element, which typically is a volatile, random access memory such as a dynamic random access memory (DRAM) or static memory (SRAM). Typically, in operation, the processor causes programs and data to be read from the non- volatile recording medium into the integrated circuit memory element, which typically allows for faster access to the program instructions and data by the processor than does the non-volatile recording medium.
The processor generally manipulates the data within the integrated circuit memory element in accordance with the program instructions and then copies the manipulated data to the non-volatile recording medium after processing is completed. A
2300751.1 variety of mechanisms are known for managing data movement between the non-volatile recording medium and the integrated circuit memory element, and the computer implemented control system that implements the methods, steps, systems and system elements described above in relation to FIG. 8 is not limited thereto. The computer implemented control system is not limited to a particular memory system.
At least part of such a memory system described above may be used to store one or more data structures (e.g., look-up tables) or equations described above. For example, at least part of the non- volatile recording medium may store at least part of a database that includes one or more of such data structures. Such a database may be any of a variety of types of databases, for example, a file system including one or more flat-file data structures where data is organized into data units separated by delimiters, a relational database where data is organized into data units stored in tables, an object- oriented database where data is organized into data units stored as objects, another type of database, or any combination thereof.
The computer implemented control system may include a video and audio data
I/O subsystem. An audio portion of the subsystem may include an analog-to-digital (A/D) converter, which receives analog audio information and converts it to digital information. The digital information may be compressed using known compression systems for storage on the hard disk to use at another time. A typical video portion of the I/O subsystem may include a video image compressor/decompressor of which many are known in the art. Such compressor/decompressors convert analog video information into compressed digital information, and vice- versa. The compressed digital information may be stored on hard disk for use at a later time.
The computer implemented control system may include one or more output devices. Example output devices include a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, liquid crystal displays (LCD) and other video output devices, printers, communication devices such as a modem or network interface, storage devices such as disk or tape, and audio output devices such as a speaker.
The computer implemented control system also may include one or more input devices. Example input devices include a keyboard, keypad, track ball, mouse, pen and tablet, communication devices such as described above, and data input devices such as audio and video capture devices and sensors. The computer implemented control system is not limited to the particular input or output devices described herein.
2300751.1 It should be appreciated that one or more of any type of computer implemented control system may be used to implement various embodiments described herein.
Aspects of the invention may be implemented in software, hardware or firmware, or any combination thereof. The computer implemented control system may include specially programmed, special purpose hardware, for example, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC). Such special-purpose hardware may be configured to implement one or more of the methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements described above as part of the computer implemented control system described above or as an independent component.
The computer implemented control system and components thereof may be programmable using any of a variety of one or more suitable computer programming languages. Such languages may include procedural programming languages, for example, C, Pascal, Fortran and BASIC, object-oriented languages, for example, C++, Java and Eiffel and other languages, such as a scripting language or even assembly language.
The methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements may be implemented using any of a variety of suitable programming languages, including procedural programming languages, object-oriented programming languages, other languages and combinations thereof, which may be executed by such a computer system. Such methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements can be implemented as separate modules of a computer program, or can be implemented individually as separate computer programs. Such modules and programs can be executed on separate computers.
Such methods, steps, simulations, algorithms, systems, and system elements, either individually or in combination, may be implemented as a computer program product tangibly embodied as computer-readable signals on a computer-readable medium, for example, a non- volatile recording medium, an integrated circuit memory element, or a combination thereof. For each such method, step, simulation, algorithm, system, or system element, such a computer program product may comprise computer- readable signals tangibly embodied on the computer-readable medium that define instructions, for example, as part of one or more programs, that, as a result of being executed by a computer, instruct the computer to perform the method, step, simulation, algorithm, system, or system element.
2300751.1 It should be appreciated that various embodiments may be formed with one or more of the above-described features. The above aspects and features may be employed in any suitable combination as the present invention is not limited in this respect. It should also be appreciated that the drawings illustrate various components and features which may be incorporated into various embodiments. For simplification, some of the drawings may illustrate more than one optional feature or component. However, the invention is not limited to the specific embodiments disclosed in the drawings. It should be recognized that the invention encompasses embodiments which may include only a portion of the components illustrated in any one drawing figure, and/or may also encompass embodiments combining components illustrated in multiple different drawing figures.
EXAMPLES
The following example is intended to illustrate certain embodiments of the present invention, but do not exemplify the full scope of the invention.
Example 1
This example describes the use of a cassette and analyzer to perform an assay to detect PSA in a sample by electrolessly depositing silver onto gold particles that are associated with the sample. FIG. 9 includes a schematic illustration of a microfluidic system 500 of a cassette used in this example. The cassette had a similar shape to cassette 20 shown in FIG. 3. The microfluidic system used in this example is generally described in International Patent Publication No. WO2005/066613 (International Patent Application Serial No. PCT/US2004/043585), filed December 20, 2004 and entitled "Assay Device and Method," which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety for all purposes.
The microfluidic system included measurement zones 510A-510D, waste containment region 512, and an outlet 514. The measurement zones included a microfluidic channel 50 microns deep and 120 microns wide, with a total length of 175 mm. The microfluidic system also included microfluidic channel 516 and channel branches 518 and 520 (with inlets 519 and 521, respectively). Channel branches 518 and 520 were 350 microns deep and 500 microns wide. Channel 516 was formed of subchannels 515, which were 350 microns deep and 500 microns wide located on alternating
2300751.1 sides of the cassette, connected by through holes 517 having a diameter of approximately 500 microns. Although FIG. 9 shows that reagents were stored on a single side of the cassette, in other embodiments, reagents were stored on both sides of the cassette.
Channel 516 had a total length of 390 mm, and branches 518 and 520 were each 360 mm long. Before sealing the channels, anti-PSA antibodies were attached to a surface of the microfluidic system in a segment of the measurement zone 510.
Prior to first use, the microfluidic system was loaded with liquid reagents which were stored in the cassette. A series of 7 wash plugs 523-529 (either water of buffer, approximately 2 microliters each) were loaded using a pipette into sub-channels 515 of channel 516 using the thru-holes. Each of the wash plugs was separated by plugs of air. Fluid 528, containing a solution of silver salt, was loaded into branching channel through port 519 using a pipette. Fluid 530, containing a reducing solution, was loaded into branching channel 520 through port 521. Each of the liquids shown in FIG.9 were separated from the other liquids by plugs of air. Ports 514, 519, 521, 536, 539, and 540 were sealed with an adhesive tape that can be easily removed or pierced. As such, the liquids were stored in the microfluidic system prior to first use.
At first use, the ports 514, 519, 521, 536, 539, and 540 were unsealed by a user peeling off a tape covering the opening of the ports. A tube 544 containing lyophilized anti-PSA antibodies labeled with colloidal gold and to which 10 microliters of sample blood (522) was added, was connected to ports 539 and 540. The tube was part of a fluid connector having a shape and configuration shown in FIG. 3. This created a fluidic connection between measurement zone 510 and channel 516, which were otherwise unconnected and not in fluid communication with one another prior to first use.
The cassette including microfluidic system 500 was inserted into an opening of an analyzer (e.g., as shown in FIG. 7). The housing of the analyzer included an arm positioned within the housing that was configured to engage a cammed surface on the cassette. The arm extended at least partially into the opening in the housing such that as the cassette was inserted into the opening, the arm was pushed away from the opening into a second position allowing the cassette to enter the opening. Once the arm engaged the inwardly cammed surface of the cassette, the cassette was positioned and retained within the housing of the analyzer, and the bias of the spring prevented the cassette from slipping out of the analyzer. The analyzer senses the cassette's insertion by means of a position sensor.
2300751.1 An identification reader (RFID reader) positioned within the housing of the analyzer was used to read an RFID tag on the cassette which includes lot identification information. The analyzer used this identifier to match lot information (e.g., calibration information, expiration date of the cassette, verification that the cassette is new, and the type of analysis/assay to be performed in the cassette) stored in the analyzer. The user was prompted to input information about the patient (from which the sample was acquired) into the analyzer using the touch screen. After the information about the cassette was verified by the user, the control system initiated the analysis.
The control system included programmed instructions to perform the analysis. To initiate the analysis, a signal was sent to the electronics controlling a vacuum system, which was a part of the analyzer and used to provide fluid flow. A manifold with o-rings was pressed against the cassette surface by a solenoid. One port on the manifold sealed (by an o-ring) to port 536 of the microfluidic system of the cassette. This port on the manifold was connected by a tube to a simple solenoid valve (SMC V124A-6G-M5, not shown) which was open to the atmosphere. A separate vacuum port on the manifold sealed (by-o-ring) to port 514 of the microfluidic system of the cassette. A vacuum of approximately -30 kPa was applied to port 514. Throughout the analysis, the channel including measurement zone 510 positioned between ports 540 and 514 had a substantially constant non-zero pressure drop of approximately -30 kPa. Sample 522 was flowed in the direction of arrow 538 into each of measurement zones 510A-510D. As the fluid passed through the measurement zones, the PSA proteins in sample 522 were captured by anti-PSA antibodies immobilized on the measurement zone walls, as described in more detail below. The sample took about 7-8 minutes to pass through the measurement zone, after which it was captured in the waste containment region 512.
Initiation of the analysis also involved the control system sending a signal to the optical detectors, which were positioned adjacent each of measurement zones 510, to initiate detection. Each of the detectors associated with the measurement zones recorded the transmission of light through the channels of the measurement zones, as shown in a plot 600 illustrated in FIG. 10. As the sample passed by each of the measurement zones, peaks 610A-610D were produced. The peaks (and troughs) measured by the detectors are signals (or are converted to signals) that are sent to the control system which compared the measured signals to reference signals or values pre-programmed into the control system. The control system included a pre-programmed set of instructions for
2300751.1 providing feedback to the microfluidic system based at least in part on the comparison of signals/values.
In a first measurement zone 510-A of device 500 of FIG. 9, the walls of the channel of this measurement zone were blocked with a blocking protein (Bovine Serum Albumin) prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device). Little or no proteins in the blood sample attached to the walls of the measurement zone 510-A (except for perhaps some non-specific binding which may be washed off). This first measurement zone acted as a negative control.
In a second measurement zone 510-B, the walls of the channel of this measurement zone were coated with a predetermined large quantity of a prostate specific antigen (PSA) prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device) to act as a high or positive control. As the blood sample passed through the second measurement zone 510- B, little or no PSA proteins in the blood bound to the walls of the channel. Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may not yet be bound to the PSA in the sample, and thus they may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a high or positive control.
In a third measurement zone 510-C, the walls of the channel of this measurement zone were coated with a predetermined low quantity of PSA prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device) to act as a low control. As the blood sample flowed through this measurement zone, little or no PSA proteins in the sample bind to the wall of the channel. Gold conjugated signal antibodies in the sample may bind to the PSA on the walls of the channel to act as a low control.
In a fourth measurement zone 510-D, the walls of the channel of this
measurement zone were coated with the capture antibody, an anti-PSA antibody, which binds to a different epitope on the PSA protein than the gold conjugated signal antibody. The walls were coated prior to first use (e.g., prior to sealing the device). As the blood sample flowed through the fourth measurement zone during use, PSA proteins in the blood sample bound to the anti-PSA antibody in a way that is proportional to the concentration of these proteins in the blood. Since the sample, which included PSA, also included gold-labeled anti-PSA antibodies coupled to the PSA, the PSA captured on the measurement zone walls formed a sandwich immunocomplex.
Wash fluids 523-529 followed the sample through the measurement zones 510 towards waste containment region 512 in the direction of arrow 538. As the wash fluids
2300751.1 were passed through the measurement zones, they washed away remaining unbound sample components. Each wash plug cleaned the channels of the measurement zones, providing progressively more complete cleaning. The last wash fluid 529 (water) washed away salts that could react with silver salts (e.g., chloride, phosphate, azide).
As shown in the plot illustrated in FIG. 10, while the wash fluids were flowing through the measurement zones, each of the detectors associated with the measurement zones measures a pattern 620 of peaks and troughs. The troughs corresponded to the wash plugs (which are clear liquids and thus provide maximum light transmission). The peaks between each plug represent the air between each plug of clear liquid. Since the assay included 7 wash plugs, 7 troughs and 7 peaks are present in plot 600. The first trough 622 is generally not as deep as the other troughs 624 since the first wash plug often catches blood cells left in the channel and thus is not completely clear.
The final peak of air 628 is much longer than the previous peaks because there were no wash plugs to follow. As a detector detects the length of this air peak, one or more signals is sent to the control system which compares the length of time of this peak to a pre-set reference signal or input value having a particular length. If the length of time of the measured peak is long enough compared to the reference signal, the control system sends a signal to the electronics controlling vent valve 536 to actuate the valve and initiate mixing of fluids 528 and 530. (Note that the signal of peak of air 628 may be combined with a signal indicating either 1) the intensity of the peak; 2) where this peak is positioned as a function of time, and/or 3) one or more signals indicating that a series of peaks 620 of particular intensity has already passed. In this way, the control system distinguishes peak of air 628 from other peaks of long duration such as peak 610 from the sample, e.g., using a pattern of signals.)
To initiate mixing, the solenoid connected by the manifold to vent port 536 is closed. Since the vacuum remains on and no air can enter through vent valve 536, air enters the device through ports 519 and 521 (which are open). This forces the two fluids 528 and 530 in the two storage channels upstream of vent valve 536 to move substantially simultaneously toward outlet 514. These reagents mix at the intersection of the channels to form an amplification reagent (a reactive silver solution) having a viscosity of about lxlO"3 Pa s. The ratio of the volumes of fluids 528 and 530 was about 1:1. The amplification reagent continued through the downstream storage channel, through tube 544, through measurement zones 510, and then to waste containment region
2300751.1 512. After a set amount of time (12 seconds), the analyzer reopened vent valve 536 such that air flows through vent valve 536 (instead of the vent ports). This left some reagent behind in the upstream storage channels 518 and 520 on the device. This also results in a single plug of mixed amplification reagent. The 12 seconds of vent-valve closure results in an amplification plug of approximately 50 μΐ^. (Instead of simple timing, another way to trigger the re-opening of the vent valve would be to detect the amplification reagent as it first enters the measurement zones.)
Because the mixed amplification reagent is stable for only a few minutes (usually less than 10 minutes), the mixing was performed less than a minute before use in measurement zone 510. The amplification reagent is a clear liquid, so when it enters the measurement zones, optical density is at its lowest. As the amplification reagent passed across the measurement zones, silver was deposited on the captured gold particles to increase the size of the colloids to amplify the signal. (As noted above, gold particles were present in the low and high positive control measurement zones and, to the extent that PSA was present in the sample, in the test measurement zone.) Silver can then be deposited on top of the already deposited silver, leaving more and more silver deposited in the measurement zones. Eventually the deposited silver reduces the transmission of light through the measurement zones. The reduction in transmitted light is proportional to the amount of silver deposited and can be related to the amount of gold colloids captured on the channel walls. In a measurement zone where no silver is deposited (the negative control for example, or the test area when the sample contains none of the target protein, such as PSA), there will be no (or minimal) increase in optical density. In a measurement zone with significant silver deposition, the slope and ultimate level of the pattern of increasing optical density will be high. The analyzer monitors the pattern of this optical density during amplification in the test area to determine the concentration of analyte in the sample. In one version of the test, the pattern is monitored within the first three minutes of amplification. The optical density in each of the measurement zones as a function of time was recorded and are shown as curves 640, 644, 642, and 646 in FIG. 10. These curves corresponded to signals that were produced in measurement zones 510-A, 510-B, 510-C, and 510-D, respectively.
After three minutes of amplification, the analyzer stops the test. No more optical measurements are recorded and the manifold is disengaged from the device. The test result is displayed on the analyzer screen and communicated to a printer, computer, or
2300751.1 whatever output the user has selected. The user may remove the device from the analyzer and throw it away. The sample and all the reagents used in the assay remain in the device. The analyzer is ready for another test.
It should be noted that the control of the flow rates of the fluids within channel 516 and the measurement zone 510 were important when flowing fluids through the system. Due to the measurement zone's relatively small cross sectional area, it served as a bottleneck, controlling the overall flow rate in the system. When the measurement zone contained liquids, the linear flow rates of the fluids in channel 516 was about 0.5 mm s 1. Fluids flowing from branching channels 518 and 520 into main channel 516 might not have mixed reproducibly at this rate, as one fluid might have flowed faster than the other, causing unequal portions of fluids 528 and 530 to be mixed. On the other hand, when the measurement zone contained air, the linear flow rates of the fluids in channel 516 and branching channels 518 and 520 were about 15 mm s"1. At this higher flow rate, the flow rate in branching channels 518 and 520 were equal and reproducible (when vent valve 536 was closed), producing reproducible mixing. For this reason, the valve connected to port 536 was not closed until fluid 542 passed through the measurement zone to the waste containment region. As noted above, determination of when fluid 542 had exited the measurement zone 510 was performed using an optical detector so as to measure transmission of light through part of measurement zone 510 in combination with a feedback system.
The microfluidic system shown in FIG. 9 was designed such that the volume of the channel between vent valve 536 and measurement zone 510 was larger than the expected volume of the mixed activated silver solution (i.e., the combined portion of fluids 528 and 530 which traveled into channel 516 while vent valve 536 was closed). This ensured that substantially all of the mixing took place at a relatively high linear flow rate (since no liquid, and only air, was present in the measurement zone 510 at this time), and before the activated solution reached the measurement zone. This configuration helped promote reproducible and equal mixing. For the assay described in this example, it was important to sustain a flow of the activated silver mixture within the measurement zone for a few minutes (e.g., 2 to 10 minutes).
This example shows that analysis of a sample in a microfluidic system of a cassette can be performed by using an analyzer that controls fluid flow in the cassette, and by using feedback from one or more measured signals to modulate fluid flow.
2300751.1 While several embodiments of the present invention have been described and illustrated herein, those of ordinary skill in the art will readily envision a variety of other means and/or structures for performing the functions and/or obtaining the results and/or one or more of the advantages described herein, and each of such variations and/or modifications is deemed to be within the scope of the present invention.
2300751.1

Claims

1. A method comprising:
initiating detection of fluids at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system; detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at the first measurement zone and forming a first signal corresponding to the first fluid and a second signal corresponding to the second fluid;
transmitting a first pattern of signals to a control system, the first pattern of signals comprising at least two of:
a) an intensity of the first signal;
b) a duration of the first signal;
c) a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time; and d) an average time period between the first and second signals; and
determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system based at least in part on the first pattern of signals.
2. A method comprising:
detecting a first fluid and a second fluid at a first measurement zone of a microfluidic system, wherein the detection step comprises detecting at least two of:
a) an opacity of the first fluid;
b) a volume of the first fluid;
c) a flow rate of the first fluid;
d) a position of the detection of the first fluid in time relative to a second position in time; and
e) an average time period between the detection of the first and second fluids; and
determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system based at least in part on the detection step.
3. A method of conducting quality control to determine abnormalities in operation of a microfluidic system, comprising:
detecting a first fluid at a first measurement zone of the microfluidic system and forming a first signal corresponding to the first fluid;
2300751.1 transmitting the first signal to a control system;
comparing the first signal to a reference signal, thereby determining the presence of abnormalities in operation of the microfluidic system; and
determining whether to stop an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system based at least in part on results of the comparing step.
4. A method as in any preceding claim, comprising continuously or periodically detecting the passing of any fluids across the first measurement zone.
5. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system comprises determining whether to stop an analysis being conducted in the microfluidic system.
6. A method as in any preceding claim, further comprising transmitting an electrical signal from the control system to a component of the microfluidic system that can modulate fluid flow as a result of the transmitting step.
7. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the component of the microfluidic system is a pump or a vacuum.
8. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the component of the microfluidic system is a valve.
9. A method as in any preceding claim, further comprising comparing the first pattern of signals to a control pattern of signals or values pre-programmed into the control system.
10. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein intensity of the first signal comprises an average or maximum intensity.
11. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first pattern of signals comprises an intensity of the first signal and a duration of the first signal.
2300751.1
12. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first pattern of signals comprises an intensity of the first signal and a position of the first signal in time relative to a time of the initiation step.
13. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first pattern of signals comprises an intensity of the first signal and an average time period between the first and second signals.
14. A method as in any preceding claim, further comprising counting a series of signals each having an intensity above or below a threshold intensity, and determining whether to modulate fluid flow in the microfluidic system based at least in part on the number of signals having the intensity above or below the threshold intensity.
15. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first and second fluids are immiscible with one another.
16. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first fluid is a liquid and the second fluid is a gas.
17. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first and second fluids are miscible with one another.
18. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first and second fluids are separated by a third, immiscible fluid.
19. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first fluid is a sample.
20. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first fluid comprises whole blood.
21. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first fluid is an amplification reagent.
2300751.1
22. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first fluid is air.
23. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first and second fluids do not contain a component of a chemical and/or biological reaction.
24. A method as in any preceding claim, further comprising continuously or periodically detecting the passing of fluids across a second measurement zone of the microfluidic system.
25. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first and second measurement zones are positioned in series.
26. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the microfluidic system comprises a first detector statically positioned adjacent the first measurement zone during the detection step.
27. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein detecting comprises measuring transmission of light through the measurement zone.
28. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first signal is indicative of the first fluid passing across the first measurement zone.
29. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first signal is indicative of a component deposited in the first measurement zone from the first fluid.
30. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first signal is indicative of a metal deposited in the first measurement zone from the first fluid.
31. A method as in any preceding claim, wherein the first signal comprises an intensity as a function of time.
32. A method as in any preceding claim, comprising applying a source of fluid flow to a microfluidic system, wherein the determining step comprises determining whether to
2300751.1 cease application of the source of fluid flow to the microfluidic system based at least in part on results of the comparing step.
33. A method as in any preceding claim, further comprising passing a second fluid across the first measurement zone of the microfluidic system, detecting the passing of the second fluid across the first measurement zone, and forming a first pattern of signals as a result of the detecting step, wherein the first pattern of signals includes a first signal indicative of the first fluid passing across the first measurement zone and a second signal indicative of the second fluid passing across the first measurement zone, wherein the first and second signals are separated by a period of time.
34. A method as in any preceding claim, further comprising transmitting the first pattern of signals to a control system, comparing at least the first pattern of signals to a pre-programmed control pattern of signals or values, and determining whether to cease application of the source of fluid flow to the microfluidic system based at least in part on results of the comparing step.
35. A method as in any preceding claim, comprising passing across the first measurement zone first and second fluids in sequence, wherein the first and second fluids are immiscible with one another, detecting a property of the first fluid and forming a first signal indicative of the property of the first fluid, transmitting the first signal to a control system, transmitting a signal from the control system to a component of the microfluidic system that can modulate fluid flow, actuating the component of the microfluidic system that can modulate fluid flow, and modulating fluid flow upstream of the first measurement zone.
36. A method as in any preceding claim, comprising transmitting the first pattern of signals to a control system, the first pattern of signals comprising at least three of:
a) an intensity of the first signal;
b) a duration of the first signal;
c) a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time; and d) an average time period between the first and second signals.
2300751.1
37. A method as in any preceding claim, comprising transmitting the first pattern of signals to a control system, the first pattern of signals comprising at least two of:
a) an intensity of the first signal;
b) a duration of the first signal;
c) a position of the first signal in time relative to a second position in time; d) an average time period between the first and second signals;
e) an intensity of the second signal;
f) a duration of the second signal; and
g) a position of the second signal in time relative to a second position in time.
2300751.1
PCT/US2011/032680 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems WO2011130625A1 (en)

Priority Applications (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA2795211A CA2795211C (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems
BR112012026406A BR112012026406B1 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 method of conducting quality control to determine abnormalities in the operation of a microfluidic system
CN201180029612.8A CN102971076B (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 FEEDBACK CONTROL in microfluid system
JP2013505175A JP6104793B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems
UAA201212930A UA110791C2 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Quality control method to determine abnormalities in the micro fluid system
EP11716151A EP2558202A1 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems
AU2011239534A AU2011239534B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems
EA201201419A EA022356B1 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Method for controlling fluids in feedback microfluidic systems
MX2012012066A MX2012012066A (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems.
IL222461A IL222461A (en) 2010-04-16 2012-10-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US32504410P 2010-04-16 2010-04-16
US32502310P 2010-04-16 2010-04-16
US61/325,023 2010-04-16
US61/325,044 2010-04-16
US36300210P 2010-07-09 2010-07-09
US61/363,002 2010-07-09

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2011130625A1 true WO2011130625A1 (en) 2011-10-20

Family

ID=44147594

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2011/032680 WO2011130625A1 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Feedback control in microfluidic systems
PCT/US2011/032685 WO2011130629A1 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Systems and devices for analysis of samples

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2011/032685 WO2011130629A1 (en) 2010-04-16 2011-04-15 Systems and devices for analysis of samples

Country Status (14)

Country Link
US (10) US8932523B2 (en)
EP (2) EP2558203A1 (en)
JP (5) JP6104793B2 (en)
CN (4) CN105381825A (en)
AU (3) AU2011239534B2 (en)
BR (2) BR112012026406B1 (en)
CA (4) CA3016967C (en)
CL (2) CL2012002890A1 (en)
CO (2) CO6640223A2 (en)
EA (2) EA023941B1 (en)
IL (3) IL222461A (en)
MX (3) MX2012012066A (en)
PE (2) PE20130799A1 (en)
WO (2) WO2011130625A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014098700A (en) * 2012-11-15 2014-05-29 Ortho Clinical Diagnostics Inc Quality/process control of lateral flow assay device based on flow monitoring
WO2014171139A1 (en) * 2013-04-16 2014-10-23 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Measurement abnormality detection method and surface plasmon-field enhanced fluorescence measurement device
US9075051B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2015-07-07 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Fluid mixing and delivery in microfluidic systems
WO2017003317A1 (en) * 2015-06-30 2017-01-05 Евгений Александрович ТОНЕВИЦКИЙ Device for pneumatically controlling valves of a microfluidic system
JP2020073885A (en) * 2012-03-05 2020-05-14 オサケユキテュア・アークティック・パートナーズ・アクチボラゲットOy Arctic Partners Ab Method and device for predicting risk of prostate cancer and prostate volume

Families Citing this family (130)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2532414C (en) 2003-07-12 2017-03-14 Accelr8 Technology Corporation Sensitive and rapid biodetection
US20120077206A1 (en) 2003-07-12 2012-03-29 Accelr8 Technology Corporation Rapid Microbial Detection and Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing
ES2439225T3 (en) 2004-01-26 2014-01-22 President And Fellows Of Harvard College System and method for fluid supply
WO2008137008A2 (en) 2007-05-04 2008-11-13 Claros Diagnostics, Inc. Fluidic connectors and microfluidic systems
US8600932B2 (en) 2007-05-07 2013-12-03 Trimble Navigation Limited Telematic asset microfluidic analysis
US8448499B2 (en) 2008-12-23 2013-05-28 C A Casyso Ag Cartridge device for a measuring system for measuring viscoelastic characteristics of a sample liquid, a corresponding measuring system, and a corresponding method
WO2010087999A1 (en) 2009-02-02 2010-08-05 Claros Diagnostics, Inc. Structures for controlling light interaction with microfluidic devices
WO2011062738A1 (en) 2009-11-23 2011-05-26 Mikhail Briman Controlled electrochemical activation of carbon-based electrodes
JP6104793B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2017-03-29 オプコ・ダイアグノスティクス・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニーOpko Diagnostics,Llc Feedback control in microfluidic systems
JP5830230B2 (en) * 2010-07-20 2015-12-09 アークレイ株式会社 Analysis apparatus and analysis method
EP2661614A2 (en) * 2011-01-03 2013-11-13 Cytonome/ST, LLC Method and apparatus for monitoring and optimizing particle sorting
US9434937B2 (en) 2011-03-07 2016-09-06 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Rapid cell purification systems
US10254204B2 (en) 2011-03-07 2019-04-09 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Membrane-assisted purification
US9739763B2 (en) * 2011-05-16 2017-08-22 Trimble Inc. Telematic locomotive microfluidic analysis
US9760685B2 (en) * 2011-05-16 2017-09-12 Trimble Inc. Telematic microfluidic analysis using handheld device
US9638663B2 (en) 2011-07-25 2017-05-02 Proxim Diagnostics Corporation Cartridge for diagnostic testing
US20130053994A1 (en) * 2011-08-31 2013-02-28 General Electric Company Method and apparatus for monitoring radiopharmaceutical processing
EP2780894A4 (en) * 2011-11-20 2015-12-09 Fio Corp A quality control sensor method, system and device for use with biological/environmental rapid diagnostic test devices
CN104081210B (en) 2011-12-23 2018-11-30 雅培医护站股份有限公司 Optical detecting device with the actuating of pneumatic type sample
US8984957B2 (en) * 2012-01-30 2015-03-24 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy System and method for testing of micro-sized materials
JP6197263B2 (en) * 2012-02-06 2017-09-20 ソニー株式会社 Microchip
EP2823427B1 (en) 2012-03-05 2020-12-16 OY Arctic Partners AB Computer systems, methods and computer readable storage medium for predicting risk of prostate gland volume
US9658629B2 (en) 2012-03-22 2017-05-23 Seagate Technology Llc Method and apparatus for controlling the temperature of components
CN103424550B (en) * 2012-05-18 2016-04-20 北京勤邦生物技术有限公司 A kind of kit of chlorine detection mycin and method
US9222874B2 (en) * 2012-06-27 2015-12-29 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Army Systems and methods for individually trapping particles from air and measuring the optical spectra or other properties of individual trapped particles
RU2015107730A (en) * 2012-08-08 2016-09-27 Конинклейке Филипс Н.В. CENTRIFUGAL MICROFLUIDIC DEVICE AND METHODS OF APPLICATION
EP2893356B1 (en) * 2012-09-05 2022-04-27 Cepheid Universal docking bay and data door in a fluidic analysis system
US9686395B2 (en) * 2012-09-11 2017-06-20 Cornell University Apparatus and method for point-of-collection measurement of a biomolecular reaction
US9983197B2 (en) * 2012-09-14 2018-05-29 University Of Manitoba Low-cost portable microfluidic system for cell migration
MX2015009264A (en) 2013-01-18 2016-03-31 Biomeme Inc Analytic device.
WO2014118549A1 (en) * 2013-01-30 2014-08-07 Vantix Holdings Limited A multi-functional sensor for an electrochemical detection system
CA3216855A1 (en) * 2013-03-11 2014-10-09 Cue Health Inc. Systems and methods for detection and quantification of analytes
CA2900708C (en) 2013-03-13 2021-06-15 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Mixing of fluids in fluidic systems
US9677109B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-06-13 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Rapid determination of microbial growth and antimicrobial susceptibility
KR102180837B1 (en) * 2013-03-27 2020-11-19 주식회사 케이씨씨 Copolymeric binder for antifouling paint, method for manufacturing the same and antifouling paint composition containing the same
KR102205650B1 (en) * 2013-06-05 2021-01-21 넥서스 디엑스, 아이엔씨. Microfluidic device, test apparatus, test system having the same and control method for the test apparatus
WO2015073999A1 (en) * 2013-11-18 2015-05-21 Integenx Inc. Cartridges and instruments for sample analysis
US20150268668A1 (en) 2014-03-20 2015-09-24 Yissum Research Development Company Of The Hebrew University Of Jerusalem Ltd. Apparatus for controlling microfluidic components
CN106663149A (en) 2014-03-28 2017-05-10 欧普科诊断有限责任公司 Compositions and methods related to diagnosis of prostate cancer
US9377400B2 (en) 2014-03-31 2016-06-28 Redshift Systems Corporation Motion modulation fluidic analyzer system
CN110702640B (en) 2014-03-31 2022-11-18 红移生物分析有限责任公司 Method of measuring properties of a fluid and method of adjusting a fluid analyzer to operate
EP3623794B1 (en) * 2014-06-18 2022-03-02 Zoetis Denmark Aps A microfluidic detection system and a microfluidic cartridge
CN107106983B (en) * 2014-10-22 2021-04-16 尹特根埃克斯有限公司 Systems and methods for sample preparation, processing, and analysis
US10279345B2 (en) 2014-12-12 2019-05-07 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Fluidic systems comprising an incubation channel, including fluidic systems formed by molding
RU2016151351A (en) * 2015-01-28 2019-02-28 КАБУСИКИ КАЙСЯ ДиЭнЭйФОРМ ANALYSIS DEVICE, ANALYSIS CHIP, ANALYSIS KIT AND METHOD OF ANALYSIS WITH THEIR APPLICATION
EP3253800B1 (en) 2015-03-27 2021-03-03 Opko Diagnostics, LLC Prostate antigen standards and uses thereof
WO2016161022A2 (en) 2015-03-30 2016-10-06 Accerlate Diagnostics, Inc. Instrument and system for rapid microorganism identification and antimicrobial agent susceptibility testing
US10253355B2 (en) 2015-03-30 2019-04-09 Accelerate Diagnostics, Inc. Instrument and system for rapid microorganism identification and antimicrobial agent susceptibility testing
JP6475069B2 (en) * 2015-04-23 2019-02-27 アズビル株式会社 Particle detection apparatus and particle detection method
SG11201708289TA (en) 2015-04-29 2017-11-29 Opko Diagnostics Llc Compositions and methods for active surveillance of prostate cancer
GB2539192A (en) * 2015-06-05 2016-12-14 Stratec Biomedical Ag Device, system and method for cooling a reagent compartment
WO2016203320A2 (en) 2015-06-19 2016-12-22 Andrew Alliance S.A. Devices and methods for measurement of liquid volumes
GB2601649B (en) * 2015-08-26 2022-09-28 Emulate Inc Perfusion manifold assembly
RU2700013C1 (en) * 2015-09-30 2019-09-12 Кодж Университеси Measuring device using cantilever based on fibers, built into cartridge
US11013576B2 (en) 2015-10-16 2021-05-25 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Articles and methods for preparing a surface for obtaining a patent sample
CA3005084A1 (en) 2015-12-11 2017-06-15 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Fluidic systems involving incubation of samples and/or reagents
US10344592B2 (en) * 2015-12-21 2019-07-09 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Flushing microfluidic sensor systems
JP6956719B2 (en) 2015-12-29 2021-11-02 オプコ・ダイアグノスティクス・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニーOpko Diagnostics,Llc Goods for collecting fluids
USD810084S1 (en) * 2016-03-23 2018-02-13 Formfox, Inc. Mobile scanner
US10987674B2 (en) 2016-04-22 2021-04-27 Visby Medical, Inc. Printed circuit board heater for an amplification module
WO2017197040A1 (en) 2016-05-11 2017-11-16 Click Diagnostics, Inc. Devices and methods for nucleic acid extraction
US10269548B1 (en) * 2016-05-16 2019-04-23 Elemental Scientific, Inc. Automatic control of flow rate for sample introduction system responsive to sample intensity
WO2017202643A1 (en) 2016-05-23 2017-11-30 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Device for use in fluid sample analysis
US10345244B2 (en) 2016-06-03 2019-07-09 International Business Machines Corporation Diagnostic test device with patterned material spots
US10352578B2 (en) * 2016-06-09 2019-07-16 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Adaptive optimization for dynamic room pressurization control
GB201611502D0 (en) * 2016-06-30 2016-08-17 Ciga Healthcare Ltd A reader for an assay device
AU2017292906B2 (en) * 2016-07-06 2021-08-26 Precision NanoSystems ULC Smart microfluidic mixing instrument and cartridges
USD800335S1 (en) * 2016-07-13 2017-10-17 Precision Nanosystems Inc. Microfluidic chip
JP2019520560A (en) 2016-07-26 2019-07-18 ヒューレット−パッカード デベロップメント カンパニー エル.ピー.Hewlett‐Packard Development Company, L.P. Microfluidic device
WO2018025705A1 (en) * 2016-08-03 2018-02-08 国立研究開発法人理化学研究所 Analysis cell, analysis device, analysis equipment, and analysis system
CA3036746A1 (en) 2016-10-07 2018-04-12 Boehringer Ingelheim Vetmedica Gmbh Method and analysis system for testing a sample
WO2018065114A1 (en) 2016-10-07 2018-04-12 Boehringer Ingelheim Vetmedica Gmbh Analysis system and method for testing a sample
WO2018079916A1 (en) * 2016-10-28 2018-05-03 주식회사 바이탈스미스 Image processing and analyzing system for ovulation detection and method for controlling same
US20190266384A1 (en) * 2016-10-28 2019-08-29 Manigene Co., Ltd. Image processing system for ovulation prediction analysis
US11635379B2 (en) * 2017-01-20 2023-04-25 The General Hospital Corporation Portable wide field fluorimeter systems
JP7113486B2 (en) 2017-02-08 2022-08-05 アヴラン インダストリアル,インコーポレーテッド Animal spray device and method
CN115453112A (en) 2017-03-28 2022-12-09 电化株式会社 Membrane carrier and liquid sample detection kit using same
USD849265S1 (en) * 2017-04-21 2019-05-21 Precision Nanosystems Inc Microfluidic chip
CN110709501A (en) * 2017-05-04 2020-01-17 苏黎世大学 Cell culture device
US11154855B2 (en) * 2017-05-08 2021-10-26 Custom Sensors And Technology Automated liquid handling and testing systems and methods
USD854188S1 (en) * 2017-05-25 2019-07-16 Koninklijke Philips N.V. Apparatus for clinical analysis
JP7208634B2 (en) * 2017-07-31 2023-01-19 株式会社フジキン Fluid control system and flow measurement method
JP7207308B2 (en) * 2017-08-03 2023-01-18 ソニーグループ株式会社 Contact lenses and detection methods
DE202017006951U1 (en) 2017-08-14 2019-02-07 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Multiplex assays to assess prostate cancer status
US11215562B2 (en) * 2017-08-28 2022-01-04 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Deformable covers on sensors and reservoirs
CN111356768A (en) * 2017-09-15 2020-06-30 生米公司 Method and system for automated sample processing
CN109765218B (en) * 2017-11-09 2022-04-12 深圳市新产业生物医学工程股份有限公司 Control method and system of consumable box storage device and consumable box storage device
RU177970U1 (en) * 2017-11-10 2018-03-16 Общество с ограниченной ответственностью "Видящие машины" Device for optical recognition of graphic elements with the function of a barcode scanner and currency detector
CN111727011A (en) * 2017-11-13 2020-09-29 印度科学院 Clinical sample storage box
CA3086538A1 (en) * 2017-12-15 2019-06-20 Evanostics Llc Optical reader for analyte testing
CN111373262A (en) * 2017-12-30 2020-07-03 深圳迈瑞生物医疗电子股份有限公司 Sample analyzer and reagent supply method thereof
USD878622S1 (en) * 2018-04-07 2020-03-17 Precision Nanosystems Inc. Microfluidic chip
EP3569716A1 (en) * 2018-05-14 2019-11-20 Consejo Superior De Investigaciones Científicas (CSIC) A method for controlling timing of events in a microfluidic device and a timer microfluidic device
US10936163B2 (en) 2018-07-17 2021-03-02 Methodical Mind, Llc. Graphical user interface system
EP3837522A4 (en) * 2018-08-15 2022-05-04 Georgia Tech Research Corporation Analysis system and methods of use thereof
CA3114522A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. Methods for detecting hook effect(s) associated with anaylte(s) of interest during or resulting from the conductance of diagnostic assay(s)
US11314375B2 (en) * 2018-10-01 2022-04-26 Precigenome, LLC Multichannel pressure control system with user friendly interface
TWI666403B (en) * 2018-11-14 2019-07-21 宇辰系統科技股份有限公司 Chemical fluid supplementing and recycling system and method
CN109374908B (en) * 2018-11-23 2024-01-26 中国科学院上海高等研究院 Vacuum automatic sample device and vacuum sample chamber suitable for high-throughput screening of solution
US11548000B2 (en) * 2018-11-28 2023-01-10 International Business Machines Corporation Structures for automated, multi-stage processing of nanofluidic chips
AU2019386853A1 (en) 2018-11-30 2021-07-08 Illumina, Inc. Systems and methods for active warming of a cartridge
USD927727S1 (en) * 2018-12-20 2021-08-10 Alveo Technologies, Inc. Reader device for a diagnostic system
CA3129524A1 (en) * 2019-02-28 2020-09-03 Miroculus Inc. Digital microfluidics devices and methods of using them
WO2020185200A1 (en) * 2019-03-08 2020-09-17 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Disposable microfluidic cassettes
CN113874708A (en) 2019-03-21 2021-12-31 生米公司 Multifunctional analysis device
WO2020205204A1 (en) 2019-04-03 2020-10-08 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Methods for the detection of prostate cancer
WO2020210292A1 (en) * 2019-04-08 2020-10-15 Miroculus Inc. Multi-cartridge digital microfluidics apparatuses and methods of use
EP3931562A4 (en) * 2019-05-07 2022-11-30 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Fluid analysis with channels formed in lids
USD908911S1 (en) * 2019-05-22 2021-01-26 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. Analyzing instrument and display monitor in combination
WO2020245964A1 (en) * 2019-06-06 2020-12-10 株式会社島津製作所 Mass spectrometry device and mass spectrometry method
US11484881B2 (en) * 2019-06-27 2022-11-01 Axbio Inc. Biomolecule diagnostic systems
US20220214199A1 (en) * 2019-07-18 2022-07-07 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Nano flow sensors
CN110376130B (en) * 2019-07-31 2022-03-15 中国计量大学 Fluorescence spectrum detection system based on negative feedback adjustment
US20210121874A1 (en) * 2019-10-29 2021-04-29 Quantum-Si Incorporated Peristaltic pumping of fluids and associated methods, systems, and devices
CA3165578A1 (en) 2019-12-27 2021-07-01 Methodical Mind, Llc. Graphical user interface system
US11352675B2 (en) 2020-01-03 2022-06-07 Visby Medical, Inc. Devices and methods for antibiotic susceptability testing
US20230051263A1 (en) * 2020-01-09 2023-02-16 The Regents Of The University Of Michigan Device for rapid and quantitative detection of drugs of abuse in sweat
AU2021211470A1 (en) * 2020-01-22 2022-09-15 Methodical Mind, Llc. Graphical user interface system
DE102020107645A1 (en) * 2020-03-19 2021-09-23 Bruker Daltonics GmbH & Co. KG Operation of a microfluidic device for the analysis of sample substances
US10953404B1 (en) * 2020-04-24 2021-03-23 Pattern Bioscience, Inc. Apparatuses for contactless loading and imaging of microfluidic chips and related methods
FR3111428A1 (en) * 2020-06-12 2021-12-17 Aryballe Technologies Electronic device for analyzing an analyte present in a consumable and interchangeable fluid and sensor, manufacturing process of this device and of this consumable and interchangeable sensor
CN116157500A (en) * 2020-07-08 2023-05-23 卢马克特公司 Sampling device and system
US20230323482A1 (en) * 2020-08-24 2023-10-12 Resolve Diagnostics Pvt. Ltd. Apparatus, device and method for photodetection of pathogens
CA3192080A1 (en) 2020-09-18 2022-03-24 Marc DEJOHN Portable devices and methods for analyzing samples
EP4232554A1 (en) * 2020-11-18 2023-08-30 Cellfe, Inc. Methods and systems for mechanoporation-based payload delivery into biological cells
CA3209153A1 (en) * 2021-02-23 2022-09-01 Alexander Koglin Lipid nanoparticle (lnp) encapsulation of mrna products
FR3122921A1 (en) * 2021-05-11 2022-11-18 Aryballe Electronic device for analyzing an analyte present in a fluid comprising a sensor and method for replacing the sensor
KR102497632B1 (en) * 2021-05-31 2023-02-08 호산테크 주식회사 Apparatus for eliminating nano bubble
AU2022332665A1 (en) * 2021-08-27 2024-03-14 Aspect Biosystems Ltd. Microfluidic-based fiber formation methods and systems
CN114200151A (en) * 2022-02-17 2022-03-18 宁波海壹生物科技有限公司 Full-automatic chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer management system

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6001231A (en) * 1997-07-15 1999-12-14 Caliper Technologies Corp. Methods and systems for monitoring and controlling fluid flow rates in microfluidic systems
US20010027918A1 (en) * 2000-01-14 2001-10-11 J. Wallace Parce Method for monitoring flow rate using fluorescent markers
US20040043585A1 (en) 2002-08-29 2004-03-04 Micron Technology, Inc., Methods to form a memory cell with metal-rich metal chalcogenide
WO2005066613A1 (en) 2003-12-31 2005-07-21 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Assay device and method
WO2008005248A2 (en) * 2006-06-30 2008-01-10 Canon U.S. Life Sciences, Inc. Real-time pcr in micro-channels
EP1898210A2 (en) * 2000-02-23 2008-03-12 Caliper Life Sciences, Inc. Multi-reservoir pressure control system

Family Cites Families (196)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3735640A (en) 1972-03-10 1973-05-29 L Chizhov Apparatus for injecting a sample into a gas chromatograph
US4318994A (en) 1979-08-30 1982-03-09 Mcdonnell Douglas Corporation Enterobacteriaceae species biochemical test card
US4517302A (en) 1982-11-15 1985-05-14 Technicon Instruments Corporation Continuous flow metering apparatus
CA1211157A (en) 1982-11-22 1986-09-09 Richard L. Columbus Capillary transport device having means for increasing the viscosity of the transported liquid
US4534465A (en) 1983-10-13 1985-08-13 Coulter Electronics, Inc. Cassette for supporting test tubes of different diameters and/or lengths
US4963498A (en) 1985-08-05 1990-10-16 Biotrack Capillary flow device
JPH0572548B1 (en) 1986-09-16 1993-10-12 Mitsubishi Corp
US5051237A (en) 1988-06-23 1991-09-24 P B Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Liquid transport system
JPH02176466A (en) 1988-12-27 1990-07-09 Mochida Pharmaceut Co Ltd Method and instrument for measuring specified material in liquid specimen
US5286454A (en) 1989-04-26 1994-02-15 Nilsson Sven Erik Cuvette
GB8915512D0 (en) 1989-07-06 1989-08-23 Sec Dep For Health Silver enhanced gold-labelled immuno assay method
US6176962B1 (en) 1990-02-28 2001-01-23 Aclara Biosciences, Inc. Methods for fabricating enclosed microchannel structures
SE470347B (en) 1990-05-10 1994-01-31 Pharmacia Lkb Biotech Microstructure for fluid flow systems and process for manufacturing such a system
CA2062027C (en) 1991-03-04 1998-05-19 William Aldrich Liquid control system for diagnostic cartridges used in analytical instruments
US5268147A (en) 1992-02-26 1993-12-07 Miles, Inc. Reversible direction capsule chemistry sample liquid analysis system and method
US5304487A (en) 1992-05-01 1994-04-19 Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Fluid handling in mesoscale analytical devices
US5726026A (en) 1992-05-01 1998-03-10 Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Mesoscale sample preparation device and systems for determination and processing of analytes
US5486335A (en) 1992-05-01 1996-01-23 Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Analysis based on flow restriction
US5637469A (en) 1992-05-01 1997-06-10 Trustees Of The University Of Pennsylvania Methods and apparatus for the detection of an analyte utilizing mesoscale flow systems
US6019944A (en) 1992-05-21 2000-02-01 Biosite Diagnostics, Inc. Diagnostic devices and apparatus for the controlled movement of reagents without membranes
US5540081A (en) * 1993-08-31 1996-07-30 Abbott Laboratories Pipetting apparatus with clot detection
CA2105515A1 (en) 1993-09-03 1995-03-04 Carlos A. Santizo Lescaille Visual immunoassay method for the detection of ligands, based on the use of opaque plastic supports
KR960705501A (en) 1993-10-28 1996-11-08 윌리암 모피트 FLUID SAMPLE COLLECTION AND INTRODUCTION DEVICE
US20040077074A1 (en) 1993-11-01 2004-04-22 Nanogen, Inc. Multi-chambered analysis device
US6638482B1 (en) 1993-11-01 2003-10-28 Nanogen, Inc. Reconfigurable detection and analysis apparatus and method
US5478751A (en) 1993-12-29 1995-12-26 Abbott Laboratories Self-venting immunodiagnositic devices and methods of performing assays
US5580523A (en) 1994-04-01 1996-12-03 Bard; Allen J. Integrated chemical synthesizers
US5571410A (en) 1994-10-19 1996-11-05 Hewlett Packard Company Fully integrated miniaturized planar liquid sample handling and analysis device
US5603351A (en) 1995-06-07 1997-02-18 David Sarnoff Research Center, Inc. Method and system for inhibiting cross-contamination in fluids of combinatorial chemistry device
US5585069A (en) 1994-11-10 1996-12-17 David Sarnoff Research Center, Inc. Partitioned microelectronic and fluidic device array for clinical diagnostics and chemical synthesis
CA2181190C (en) 1994-11-14 2001-02-06 Peter Wilding Mesoscale sample preparation device and systems for determination and processing of analytes
US5731212A (en) 1994-12-20 1998-03-24 International Technidyne Corporation Test apparatus and method for testing cuvette accommodated samples
GB9502112D0 (en) 1995-02-03 1995-03-22 British Biocell Int Assay device and method
US6207369B1 (en) 1995-03-10 2001-03-27 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc Multi-array, multi-specific electrochemiluminescence testing
US6673533B1 (en) 1995-03-10 2004-01-06 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc. Multi-array multi-specific electrochemiluminescence testing
US6168948B1 (en) 1995-06-29 2001-01-02 Affymetrix, Inc. Miniaturized genetic analysis systems and methods
US5856174A (en) 1995-06-29 1999-01-05 Affymetrix, Inc. Integrated nucleic acid diagnostic device
AU6788796A (en) 1995-08-03 1997-03-05 Akzo Nobel N.V. Diagnostic device
US20020068357A1 (en) * 1995-09-28 2002-06-06 Mathies Richard A. Miniaturized integrated nucleic acid processing and analysis device and method
US6709869B2 (en) 1995-12-18 2004-03-23 Tecan Trading Ag Devices and methods for using centripetal acceleration to drive fluid movement in a microfluidics system
US6114122A (en) 1996-03-26 2000-09-05 Affymetrix, Inc. Fluidics station with a mounting system and method of using
US5885470A (en) 1997-04-14 1999-03-23 Caliper Technologies Corporation Controlled fluid transport in microfabricated polymeric substrates
US6399023B1 (en) 1996-04-16 2002-06-04 Caliper Technologies Corp. Analytical system and method
US5942443A (en) 1996-06-28 1999-08-24 Caliper Technologies Corporation High throughput screening assay systems in microscale fluidic devices
EP1021554B1 (en) 1996-04-25 2007-03-21 Genicon Sciences Corporation Analyte assay using particulate labels
US6586193B2 (en) 1996-04-25 2003-07-01 Genicon Sciences Corporation Analyte assay using particulate labels
US6547942B1 (en) 1996-06-28 2003-04-15 Caliper Technologies Corp. Electropipettor and compensation means for electrophoretic bias
BR9710054A (en) 1996-06-28 2000-01-11 Caliper Techn Corp Apparatus for separating test compounds for an effect on a biochemical system and for detecting a effect of a test compound on a biochemical system, procedures for determining whether a sample contains a compound capable of affecting a biochemical system, for separating a plurality of test compounds for an effect on a biochemical system and uses of a microfluidic system and a test substrate.
US5916524A (en) 1997-07-23 1999-06-29 Bio-Dot, Inc. Dispensing apparatus having improved dynamic range
US6074827A (en) 1996-07-30 2000-06-13 Aclara Biosciences, Inc. Microfluidic method for nucleic acid purification and processing
WO1998028623A1 (en) 1996-12-20 1998-07-02 Gamera Bioscience Corporation An affinity binding-based system for detecting particulates in a fluid
US6632619B1 (en) 1997-05-16 2003-10-14 The Governors Of The University Of Alberta Microfluidic system and methods of use
US6524790B1 (en) 1997-06-09 2003-02-25 Caliper Technologies Corp. Apparatus and methods for correcting for variable velocity in microfluidic systems
US5932799A (en) 1997-07-21 1999-08-03 Ysi Incorporated Microfluidic analyzer module
US6073482A (en) 1997-07-21 2000-06-13 Ysi Incorporated Fluid flow module
US6293012B1 (en) 1997-07-21 2001-09-25 Ysi Incorporated Method of making a fluid flow module
US6375871B1 (en) 1998-06-18 2002-04-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of manufacturing microfluidic articles
US5876675A (en) 1997-08-05 1999-03-02 Caliper Technologies Corp. Microfluidic devices and systems
US6190616B1 (en) 1997-09-11 2001-02-20 Molecular Dynamics, Inc. Capillary valve, connector, and router
US20020092767A1 (en) 1997-09-19 2002-07-18 Aclara Biosciences, Inc. Multiple array microfluidic device units
US6136272A (en) 1997-09-26 2000-10-24 University Of Washington Device for rapidly joining and splitting fluid layers
US5842787A (en) 1997-10-09 1998-12-01 Caliper Technologies Corporation Microfluidic systems incorporating varied channel dimensions
DE59803938D1 (en) 1997-11-19 2002-05-29 Biognosis Gmbh DEVICE FOR THE SEQUENTIAL OUTPUT OF FLOWABLE REAGENTS
US6251343B1 (en) 1998-02-24 2001-06-26 Caliper Technologies Corp. Microfluidic devices and systems incorporating cover layers
WO1999060397A1 (en) 1998-05-18 1999-11-25 University Of Washington Liquid analysis cartridge
US7087148B1 (en) 1998-06-23 2006-08-08 Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes
US6375901B1 (en) 1998-06-29 2002-04-23 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Chemico-mechanical microvalve and devices comprising the same
US6794197B1 (en) 1998-07-14 2004-09-21 Zyomyx, Inc. Microdevice and method for detecting a characteristic of a fluid
US6333200B1 (en) 1998-07-27 2001-12-25 University Of Delaware Miniaturized immunosensor assembled from colloidal particles between micropatterned electrodes
US6103199A (en) 1998-09-15 2000-08-15 Aclara Biosciences, Inc. Capillary electroflow apparatus and method
BR9914554A (en) 1998-10-13 2001-06-26 Biomicro Systems Inc Fluid circuit components based on passive fluid dynamics
US6146489A (en) 1998-11-19 2000-11-14 General Electric Company Method and apparatus for depositing scintillator material on radiation imager
US6416642B1 (en) 1999-01-21 2002-07-09 Caliper Technologies Corp. Method and apparatus for continuous liquid flow in microscale channels using pressure injection, wicking, and electrokinetic injection
US20020019059A1 (en) 1999-01-28 2002-02-14 Calvin Y.H. Chow Devices, systems and methods for time domain multiplexing of reagents
US6297020B1 (en) 1999-03-01 2001-10-02 Bayer Corporation Device for carrying out lateral-flow assays involving more than one analyte
JP2000323241A (en) 1999-05-12 2000-11-24 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Connector
EP1054259A1 (en) 1999-05-19 2000-11-22 Remacle, José Method for the identification of a target compound
JP4495866B2 (en) 1999-05-28 2010-07-07 セフィード Cartridge for controlling chemical reactions
DE19928412C2 (en) 1999-06-22 2002-03-21 Agilent Technologies Inc Supply element for a laboratory microchip
US6353475B1 (en) 1999-07-12 2002-03-05 Caliper Technologies Corp. Light source power modulation for use with chemical and biochemical analysis
AU6117700A (en) 1999-07-23 2001-02-13 Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois, The Microfabricated devices and method of manufacturing the same
US6495104B1 (en) 1999-08-19 2002-12-17 Caliper Technologies Corp. Indicator components for microfluidic systems
US6858185B1 (en) 1999-08-25 2005-02-22 Caliper Life Sciences, Inc. Dilutions in high throughput systems with a single vacuum source
US6906797B1 (en) 1999-09-13 2005-06-14 Aclara Biosciences, Inc. Side light activated microfluid channels
US6361958B1 (en) 1999-11-12 2002-03-26 Motorola, Inc. Biochannel assay for hybridization with biomaterial
WO2001049414A2 (en) 2000-01-06 2001-07-12 Caliper Technologies Corp. Ultra high throughput sampling and analysis systems and methods
JP2003524183A (en) * 2000-02-23 2003-08-12 カリパー・テクノロジーズ・コープ. Multi-reservoir pressure control system
US6488896B2 (en) 2000-03-14 2002-12-03 Micronics, Inc. Microfluidic analysis cartridge
US20050118073A1 (en) 2003-11-26 2005-06-02 Fluidigm Corporation Devices and methods for holding microfluidic devices
US6561208B1 (en) 2000-04-14 2003-05-13 Nanostream, Inc. Fluidic impedances in microfluidic system
US6716620B2 (en) 2000-04-17 2004-04-06 Purdue Research Foundation Biosensor and related method
CA2406718A1 (en) 2000-05-11 2001-11-15 Caliper Technologies Corp. Microfluidic devices and methods to regulate hydrodynamic and electrical resistance utilizing bulk viscosity enhancers
US20010048637A1 (en) 2000-05-24 2001-12-06 Weigl Bernhard H. Microfluidic system and method
US8518328B2 (en) 2005-12-27 2013-08-27 Honeywell International Inc. Fluid sensing and control in a fluidic analyzer
US20060263888A1 (en) * 2000-06-02 2006-11-23 Honeywell International Inc. Differential white blood count on a disposable card
US8329118B2 (en) * 2004-09-02 2012-12-11 Honeywell International Inc. Method and apparatus for determining one or more operating parameters for a microfluidic circuit
US6549275B1 (en) * 2000-08-02 2003-04-15 Honeywell International Inc. Optical detection system for flow cytometry
US20030118486A1 (en) 2000-07-03 2003-06-26 Xeotron Corporation Fluidic methods and devices for parallel chemical reactions
US7061595B2 (en) * 2000-08-02 2006-06-13 Honeywell International Inc. Miniaturized flow controller with closed loop regulation
US7277166B2 (en) * 2000-08-02 2007-10-02 Honeywell International Inc. Cytometer analysis cartridge optical configuration
US20020142618A1 (en) 2000-08-04 2002-10-03 Caliper Technologies Corp. Control of operation conditions within fluidic systems
US6610499B1 (en) 2000-08-31 2003-08-26 The Regents Of The University Of California Capillary array and related methods
GB2366529A (en) 2000-09-11 2002-03-13 Univ Sheffield Fluidic control valve for an assembly containing a plurality of microreactors
WO2002022264A2 (en) 2000-09-18 2002-03-21 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Method and apparatus for gradient generation
US6780584B1 (en) 2000-09-27 2004-08-24 Nanogen, Inc. Electronic systems and component devices for macroscopic and microscopic molecular biological reactions, analyses and diagnostics
US6934836B2 (en) 2000-10-06 2005-08-23 Protasis Corporation Fluid separation conduit cartridge with encryption capability
US6827095B2 (en) 2000-10-12 2004-12-07 Nanostream, Inc. Modular microfluidic systems
JP2002236131A (en) 2000-12-08 2002-08-23 Minolta Co Ltd Microchip
US6878755B2 (en) 2001-01-22 2005-04-12 Microgen Systems, Inc. Automated microfabrication-based biodetector
US6875403B2 (en) 2001-02-09 2005-04-05 Microchem Solutions Method and apparatus for reproducible sample injection on microfabricated devices
US6949377B2 (en) 2001-03-05 2005-09-27 Ho Winston Z Chemiluminescence-based microfluidic biochip
DE10111457B4 (en) 2001-03-09 2006-12-14 Siemens Ag diagnostic device
US7010391B2 (en) * 2001-03-28 2006-03-07 Handylab, Inc. Methods and systems for control of microfluidic devices
DE10115474A1 (en) 2001-03-29 2002-10-10 Infineon Technologies Ag Microfluid channel structure used for carrying out chemical, biological and/or physical processes comprises channel sections arranged in series with a microchannel between connections in the flow direction of the medium
US6742661B1 (en) 2001-04-03 2004-06-01 Micronics, Inc. Well-plate microfluidics
KR100425536B1 (en) 2001-07-16 2004-03-30 학교법인 포항공과대학교 Bread board for microfluidic chip
FR2828281B1 (en) 2001-08-02 2004-12-31 Biocytex DEVICE FOR ANALYZING A SAMPLE IN PARTICULAR BY FLOW CYTOMETRY
US7094379B2 (en) 2001-10-24 2006-08-22 Commissariat A L'energie Atomique Device for parallel and synchronous injection for sequential injection of different reagents
US20030138969A1 (en) 2002-01-24 2003-07-24 Jakobsen Mogens Havsteen Closed substrate platforms suitable for analysis of biomolecules
US20040195728A1 (en) 2001-10-26 2004-10-07 Dennis Slomski System and method for injection molded micro-replication of micro-fluidic substrates
JP4191608B2 (en) 2001-12-05 2008-12-03 ユニヴァーシティ オブ ワシントン Microfluidic devices and surface modification processes for solid phase affinity binding assays
WO2003054513A2 (en) 2001-12-20 2003-07-03 Radius Biosciences Centrifugal array processing device
US6982787B1 (en) 2002-01-02 2006-01-03 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Air Force Modification of the degree of liquid contact with a solid by control of surface and micro-channel capillary geometry
US7611616B2 (en) 2002-05-07 2009-11-03 Microfabrica Inc. Mesoscale and microscale device fabrication methods using split structures and alignment elements
JP4057967B2 (en) * 2002-07-31 2008-03-05 株式会社東芝 Automatic nucleotide sequence analyzer
US7244961B2 (en) 2002-08-02 2007-07-17 Silicon Valley Scientific Integrated system with modular microfluidic components
WO2004106942A2 (en) 2002-08-21 2004-12-09 Shell Internationale Research Maatschappij B.V. Method for measuring fluid chemistry in drilling and production operations
AU2003264734A1 (en) 2002-09-06 2004-03-29 Epigem Limited Modular microfluidic system
US6878271B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2005-04-12 Cytonome, Inc. Implementation of microfluidic components in a microfluidic system
US7094345B2 (en) 2002-09-09 2006-08-22 Cytonome, Inc. Implementation of microfluidic components, including molecular fractionation devices, in a microfluidic system
SE524730C2 (en) 2002-11-20 2004-09-21 Boule Medical Ab Blood Unit
US20060076482A1 (en) 2002-12-13 2006-04-13 Hobbs Steven E High throughput systems and methods for parallel sample analysis
US6987263B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2006-01-17 Nanostream, Inc. High throughput systems and methods for parallel sample analysis
CA2772050C (en) * 2002-12-26 2016-09-06 Meso Scale Technologies, Llc. Assay cartridges and methods of using the same
US20050221281A1 (en) 2003-01-08 2005-10-06 Ho Winston Z Self-contained microfluidic biochip and apparatus
DE10315074A1 (en) 2003-04-02 2004-10-14 Clondiag Chip Technologies Gmbh Device for the duplication and detection of nucleic acids
GB0307999D0 (en) 2003-04-07 2003-05-14 Glaxo Group Ltd A system
US7011793B2 (en) 2003-05-15 2006-03-14 Kionix, Inc. Reconfigurable modular microfluidic system and method of fabrication
US7435381B2 (en) 2003-05-29 2008-10-14 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. Packaging of microfluidic devices
US7357898B2 (en) 2003-07-31 2008-04-15 Agency For Science, Technology And Research Microfluidics packages and methods of using same
JP2005106669A (en) 2003-09-30 2005-04-21 Olympus Corp Reaction/measurement system of organism-related substance
US20050118061A1 (en) 2003-11-28 2005-06-02 Sysmex Corporation Analyzer, assay cartridge and analyzing method
US20080107565A1 (en) * 2003-12-10 2008-05-08 The Provost Fellows And Scholars Of The College Of The Holy And Undivided Trinity Of Queen Elizabeth Modular Biochip Assembly
US8030057B2 (en) 2004-01-26 2011-10-04 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Fluid delivery system and method
ES2439225T3 (en) 2004-01-26 2014-01-22 President And Fellows Of Harvard College System and method for fluid supply
US20060257941A1 (en) 2004-02-27 2006-11-16 Mcdevitt John T Integration of fluids and reagents into self-contained cartridges containing particle and membrane sensor elements
US8101431B2 (en) 2004-02-27 2012-01-24 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Integration of fluids and reagents into self-contained cartridges containing sensor elements and reagent delivery systems
US8323564B2 (en) 2004-05-14 2012-12-04 Honeywell International Inc. Portable sample analyzer system
US7655470B2 (en) 2004-10-29 2010-02-02 University Of Chicago Method for manipulating a plurality of plugs and performing reactions therein in microfluidic systems
EP1611954A1 (en) 2004-07-03 2006-01-04 Roche Diagnostics GmbH Liquid reservoir connector
JP4370214B2 (en) 2004-07-29 2009-11-25 アルプス電気株式会社 Inspection plate and inspection method using the inspection plate
WO2006018044A1 (en) 2004-08-18 2006-02-23 Agilent Technologies, Inc. Microfluidic assembly with coupled microfluidic devices
EP1805498A4 (en) 2004-10-22 2012-07-04 Univ Vanderbilt On-chip polarimetry for high-throughput screening of nanoliter and smaller sample volumes
GB0426082D0 (en) 2004-11-26 2004-12-29 Norchip As A device for carrying out biological assays
US20060172425A1 (en) * 2005-02-01 2006-08-03 Bayer Healthcare, Llc Colored buffer solution for automated clinical analyzer
KR100647317B1 (en) 2005-02-03 2006-11-23 삼성전자주식회사 Optical system for multi-channel fluorescence measurement of microfluidic chip and multi-channel fluorescence sample analyzer
US7666355B2 (en) 2005-03-07 2010-02-23 Tino Alavie Automated analyzer
US7275682B2 (en) * 2005-03-24 2007-10-02 Varian, Inc. Sample identification utilizing RFID tags
WO2006103440A2 (en) 2005-04-01 2006-10-05 Akubio Limited Docking mechanism for a sensor cartridge
US20060257290A1 (en) * 2005-04-13 2006-11-16 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Fluid dispenser, fluid dispensing method and assay apparatus for assay in utilizing attenuated total reflection
CA2604323A1 (en) 2005-04-19 2006-10-26 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Fluidic structures including meandering and wide channels
JP2006308428A (en) 2005-04-28 2006-11-09 Hitachi High-Technologies Corp Nucleic acid analysis method, nucleic acid analyzer, and cartridge for nucleic acid analysis
CA2610875A1 (en) 2005-06-06 2006-12-14 Decision Biomarkers, Inc. Assays based on liquid flow over arrays
ES2373686T3 (en) * 2005-06-23 2012-02-07 Biocartis Sa CARTRIDGE, SYSTEM AND PROCEDURE FOR AUTOMATED MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS.
JP4995197B2 (en) * 2005-07-01 2012-08-08 ハネウェル・インターナショナル・インコーポレーテッド Molded cartridge with 3D hydrodynamic focusing
WO2007005974A2 (en) 2005-07-01 2007-01-11 Honeywell International, Inc. A flow metered analyzer
EP1901846B1 (en) 2005-07-01 2015-01-14 Honeywell International Inc. A microfluidic card for rbc analysis
JP2007017354A (en) 2005-07-08 2007-01-25 Sumitomo Bakelite Co Ltd Chemical reaction detecting system
DE102005034642B3 (en) * 2005-07-25 2006-08-03 Siemens Ag Laboratory microfluidic analytical mixer unit has two separate passage systems, one of which has internal leak detector
US20070048189A1 (en) 2005-08-26 2007-03-01 Applera Corporation Fluid processing device, system, kit, and method
DE102005048236A1 (en) 2005-10-07 2007-04-12 Ministerium für Wissenschaft, Forschung und Kunst Baden-Württemberg Apparatus and method for determining the volume fractions of the phases in a suspension
WO2007052471A1 (en) 2005-11-07 2007-05-10 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. Microreactor and method of liquid feeding making use of the same
JP2007147456A (en) 2005-11-28 2007-06-14 Seiko Epson Corp Micro-fluid system, specimen analyzer, and method for detecting or measuring target substance
CN101379385A (en) * 2005-12-22 2009-03-04 霍尼韦尔国际公司 Portable sample analyzer cartridge
EP1963866B1 (en) 2005-12-22 2018-05-16 Honeywell International Inc. Hematological analyzer system with removable cartridge
CN101004423B (en) 2006-01-19 2011-12-28 博奥生物有限公司 Card, kit system in use for analyzing sample of liquid
WO2007097257A1 (en) * 2006-02-23 2007-08-30 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic, Inc. Inspection equipment using microchip
US7629124B2 (en) * 2006-06-30 2009-12-08 Canon U.S. Life Sciences, Inc. Real-time PCR in micro-channels
WO2008028124A1 (en) 2006-09-01 2008-03-06 The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Arkansas Methods and systems for detection of contaminants
US20080085219A1 (en) 2006-10-05 2008-04-10 Beebe David J Microfluidic platform and method
WO2008123112A1 (en) 2007-03-23 2008-10-16 Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba Nucleic acid detection cassette and nucleic acid detection apparatus
WO2008118098A1 (en) 2007-03-26 2008-10-02 Agency For Science, Technology And Research Fluid cartridge, pump and fluid valve arrangement
WO2008137008A2 (en) 2007-05-04 2008-11-13 Claros Diagnostics, Inc. Fluidic connectors and microfluidic systems
CN101970111B (en) * 2007-06-21 2013-09-11 简·探针公司 Instrument and receptacles for performing processes
KR101307859B1 (en) 2007-07-19 2013-09-12 삼성전자주식회사 Bio-chemical analyzer and method for controlling inside temperatures thereof
US9795697B2 (en) 2007-09-19 2017-10-24 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Liquid containment for integrated assays
JP2009115729A (en) 2007-11-09 2009-05-28 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Inc Microchip inspection device
EP2209554B1 (en) 2007-11-13 2017-10-11 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Modular sensor cassette
JP2009229263A (en) * 2008-03-24 2009-10-08 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Inc Inspection system
JP2009257988A (en) * 2008-04-18 2009-11-05 Konica Minolta Medical & Graphic Inc Inspection device
US8222049B2 (en) 2008-04-25 2012-07-17 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Flow control in microfluidic systems
KR101099495B1 (en) * 2008-10-14 2011-12-28 삼성전자주식회사 Centrifugal force-based microfluidic device, method of manufacturing the same and sample analysis method using the same
DK2376226T3 (en) 2008-12-18 2018-10-15 Opko Diagnostics Llc IMPROVED REAGENT STORAGE IN MICROFLUIDIC SYSTEMS AND RELATED ARTICLES AND PROCEDURES
WO2010087999A1 (en) 2009-02-02 2010-08-05 Claros Diagnostics, Inc. Structures for controlling light interaction with microfluidic devices
EP2504105B1 (en) 2009-11-24 2021-02-17 Opko Diagnostics, LLC Fluid mixing and delivery in microfluidic systems
JP6104793B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2017-03-29 オプコ・ダイアグノスティクス・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニーOpko Diagnostics,Llc Feedback control in microfluidic systems

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6001231A (en) * 1997-07-15 1999-12-14 Caliper Technologies Corp. Methods and systems for monitoring and controlling fluid flow rates in microfluidic systems
US20010027918A1 (en) * 2000-01-14 2001-10-11 J. Wallace Parce Method for monitoring flow rate using fluorescent markers
EP1898210A2 (en) * 2000-02-23 2008-03-12 Caliper Life Sciences, Inc. Multi-reservoir pressure control system
US20040043585A1 (en) 2002-08-29 2004-03-04 Micron Technology, Inc., Methods to form a memory cell with metal-rich metal chalcogenide
WO2005066613A1 (en) 2003-12-31 2005-07-21 President And Fellows Of Harvard College Assay device and method
WO2008005248A2 (en) * 2006-06-30 2008-01-10 Canon U.S. Life Sciences, Inc. Real-time pcr in micro-channels

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9075051B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2015-07-07 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Fluid mixing and delivery in microfluidic systems
US9731291B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2017-08-15 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Fluid mixing and delivery in microfluidic systems
US10413899B2 (en) 2009-11-24 2019-09-17 Opko Diagnostics, Llc Fluid mixing and delivery in microfluidic systems
JP2020073885A (en) * 2012-03-05 2020-05-14 オサケユキテュア・アークティック・パートナーズ・アクチボラゲットOy Arctic Partners Ab Method and device for predicting risk of prostate cancer and prostate volume
JP2014098700A (en) * 2012-11-15 2014-05-29 Ortho Clinical Diagnostics Inc Quality/process control of lateral flow assay device based on flow monitoring
US10509031B2 (en) 2012-11-15 2019-12-17 Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. Quality/process control of a lateral flow assay device based on flow monitoring
WO2014171139A1 (en) * 2013-04-16 2014-10-23 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Measurement abnormality detection method and surface plasmon-field enhanced fluorescence measurement device
JPWO2014171139A1 (en) * 2013-04-16 2017-02-16 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Measurement abnormality detection method and surface plasmon excitation enhanced fluorescence measurement apparatus
JP2018091861A (en) * 2013-04-16 2018-06-14 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Method for detecting measurement abnormality and surface plasmon-field enhanced fluorescence measurement device
WO2017003317A1 (en) * 2015-06-30 2017-01-05 Евгений Александрович ТОНЕВИЦКИЙ Device for pneumatically controlling valves of a microfluidic system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2016218074A (en) 2016-12-22
BR112012026366B1 (en) 2020-05-05
US20110253224A1 (en) 2011-10-20
US20110256551A1 (en) 2011-10-20
JP7168638B2 (en) 2022-11-09
JP6104793B2 (en) 2017-03-29
US20140234180A1 (en) 2014-08-21
US20130224075A1 (en) 2013-08-29
IL222461A (en) 2017-04-30
CA2795211C (en) 2018-11-06
MX2012012067A (en) 2012-12-17
CA3016653A1 (en) 2011-10-20
JP6904932B2 (en) 2021-07-21
BR112012026366A2 (en) 2017-10-10
JP2013525762A (en) 2013-06-20
BR112012026406A2 (en) 2016-08-02
US9682376B2 (en) 2017-06-20
CA2795211A1 (en) 2011-10-20
EA201201420A1 (en) 2013-02-28
US10456784B2 (en) 2019-10-29
AU2013204955C1 (en) 2017-11-30
US20150343443A1 (en) 2015-12-03
CA2795215C (en) 2018-11-06
IL222456A (en) 2017-08-31
EA022356B1 (en) 2015-12-30
MX363916B (en) 2019-04-05
IL243824A0 (en) 2016-04-21
CL2012002889A1 (en) 2013-08-09
EA023941B1 (en) 2016-07-29
CN105381825A (en) 2016-03-09
CN102971076B (en) 2015-11-25
AU2013204955B2 (en) 2015-01-22
US20170239656A1 (en) 2017-08-24
CN102939160B (en) 2016-10-12
AU2013204955A1 (en) 2013-05-16
US8765062B2 (en) 2014-07-01
JP6204190B2 (en) 2017-09-27
EA201201419A1 (en) 2013-04-30
CA3016967A1 (en) 2011-10-20
WO2011130629A1 (en) 2011-10-20
CA2795215A1 (en) 2011-10-20
US8932523B2 (en) 2015-01-13
CA3016967C (en) 2021-08-31
MX2012012066A (en) 2012-12-17
EP2558203A1 (en) 2013-02-20
US20140038166A1 (en) 2014-02-06
US11458473B2 (en) 2022-10-04
CL2012002890A1 (en) 2013-01-25
CO6640223A2 (en) 2013-03-22
CN107102156B (en) 2020-06-16
US9116124B2 (en) 2015-08-25
JP2018200323A (en) 2018-12-20
US20150086997A1 (en) 2015-03-26
US8580569B2 (en) 2013-11-12
CN102971076A (en) 2013-03-13
CN102939160A (en) 2013-02-20
US20200070164A1 (en) 2020-03-05
PE20130799A1 (en) 2013-07-10
US20180236448A1 (en) 2018-08-23
AU2011239534B2 (en) 2015-01-22
JP2021089285A (en) 2021-06-10
JP2013525763A (en) 2013-06-20
CN107102156A (en) 2017-08-29
CO6630192A2 (en) 2013-03-01
AU2011239534A1 (en) 2012-11-15
US9643182B2 (en) 2017-05-09
BR112012026406B1 (en) 2020-06-09
PE20130803A1 (en) 2013-07-10
IL243824B (en) 2018-05-31
EP2558202A1 (en) 2013-02-20
CA3016653C (en) 2024-01-02
AU2011239538B2 (en) 2014-10-23
US9981266B2 (en) 2018-05-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11458473B2 (en) Systems and devices for analysis of samples
AU2011239538A1 (en) Systems and devices for analysis of samples
AU2015202055B2 (en) Systems and devices for analysis of samples

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 201180029612.8

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 11716151

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2795211

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2013505175

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 002025-2012

Country of ref document: PE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: MX/A/2012/012066

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: A201212930

Country of ref document: UA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2011716151

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2011239534

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20110415

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12207302

Country of ref document: CO

Ref document number: 201201419

Country of ref document: EA

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112012026406

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112012026406

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20121015